Garmin Software Version 0764 09

2015-05-27

: Garmin Garmin-Software-Version-0764-09-720566 garmin-software-version-0764-09-720566 garmin pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 588 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

®
Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus Perspective™
by Garmin Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Copyright © 2008-2010 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software 0764.09 or later for the Cirrus Perspective Integrated Avionics System. Some
differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions. Always refer
to the FAA approved Airplane Flight Manual for a description of systems, limitations and procedures. For a complete list of Garmin manuals
with corresponding part numbers and system software versions, refer to www.garmin.com.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K
Tel: 44/0870.8501241 Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, SafeTaxi®, and ESP™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective™ is a trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation; Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.;
Skywatch® and Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
November 2010 Printed in the U.S.A.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
i
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
Within the warranty period, Garmin will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or
replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and/or labor incidental to the direct repair of said product. Garmin may,
at its discretion with prior approval, reimburse an authorized Garmin Service Center for associated labor costs incurred for removal and
replacement of the panel mount product installed in an aircraft. The customer shall be responsible for any transportation or other cost. This
warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product
damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or
other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider
of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin
reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any
country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply in every case.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating the nearest Service Center, call
Garmin Customer Service at one of the numbers listed below.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Garmin International Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062
Telephone: (913)397-8200
Telephone Toll Free: (888)606-5482
Facsimile: (913)397-8282
Facsimile Toll Free: (800)801-4670
E-mail: orders@garmin.com
avionics@garmin.com
warranty@garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Southampton, SO40
9RB, UK
Telephone: ++44 (0) 870-8501243
Telephone Toll Free: ++44 (0) 0808 238 0000
(option 5)
Facsimile: ++44 (0) 238052004
E-mail: avionics.europe@garmin.com
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. Aii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the Air Data Computer, or
other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure
altitude displayed by the Perspective
™
PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the Perspective
™
system must
be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated
database do so entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data
is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING: Use of the L-3 WX-500 Stormscope
®
is not intended for hazardous weather penetration
(thunderstorm penetration). Stormscope information, as displayed on the Perspective
™,
is to be used only
for weather avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: XM Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by the GDL 69A is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for
short-range weather avoidance.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: The Perspective
™
has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize
that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical.
Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by
the Perspective
™
. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-
checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, Perspective
™
operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING:
The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Perspective
™
utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the Perspective
™
can
be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING:
To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
Perspective
™
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Pilot’s Operating Handbook. Thoroughly practice basic
operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the Perspective
™
to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts,
etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING
: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the Perspective
™
to attempt to
penetrate a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical
Information Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe
or giving an intense radar echo.”
WARNING
:
Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING:
Because of variations in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. Aiv
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING:
Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Perspective
™
does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the Perspective
™
panel and displays, are subject to change, and may not reflect the most current Perspective
™
system.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE
: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. For additional information, refer to the website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
v
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number Revision Date Page Range Description
190-00820-00 A 04/11/08 ALL Initial release
B 05/02/08 408 through
421
Made clerical changes
C 05/12/08 v Made clerical changes
D 06/04/08 184 and I-1 Made update to optional equipment and made clerical changes
190-00820-01 A 09/29/08 i – I-6 Added Enhanced Vision System
Added changes in page navigation
Added new procedures for creating user waypoints
Added importing and exporting flight plans
Updated Warning, Caution and Advisory Alerts
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
190-00820-02 A 11/17/08 i – I-6 Added Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI)
Added the SR20
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
190-00820-03 1TP 6/30/09 i – I-6 Added AOPA Airport Directory
Added dual navigation database capability
Added database synchronization
Added other GDU 10.00 parameters
190-00820-04 A 2/28/10 i – I-6 Added the SR22T
Updated Warning and Caution Alerts
Added other GDU 11.00 parameters
190-00820-05 A 5/3/10 i – I-6 Added GTS 33 w/ES transponder option
Added GTS 800 traffic option
Added other GDU 11.01 parameters
190-00820-06 A 11/15/10 i-I-6 Added Profile View
Updated Active Flight Plan modification procedures to include the
Quick Select Box and Insertion Point Indicator
Updated XM Weather product status display
Added Electronic Stability and Protection
Added Underspeed Protection
Added Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
Added Hypoxia Recognition System
Added integrated fuel quantity gauges
Added other GDU 11.11 parameters
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. Avi
REVISION INFORMATION
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 Line Replaceable Units (LRU) ................................. 2
1.2 System Controls....................................................... 7
PFD/MFD Controls ........................................................ 7
PFD/MFD Control Unit ................................................... 9
Audio Panel Controls .................................................. 12
Softkey Function ......................................................... 14
1.3 Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 22
1.4 System Power-up ................................................... 23
1.5 System Operation .................................................. 24
Display Operation ....................................................... 24
System Annunciations ................................................. 26
System Status ............................................................. 27
AHRS Operation ......................................................... 28
GPS Receiver Operation .............................................. 29
1.6 Accessing System Functionality .......................... 34
Menus ....................................................................... 34
Page Groups .............................................................. 35
System Settings .......................................................... 39
Timers ....................................................................... 45
1.7 Display Backlighting ............................................. 48
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments ................................................. 52
Airspeed Indicator ...................................................... 52
Attitude Indicator ....................................................... 54
Altimeter ................................................................... 55
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) ....................................... 58
Vertical Deviation ....................................................... 58
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) .............................. 59
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) .................................. 64
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data .................................... 71
Temperature Display ................................................... 71
Wind Data ................................................................. 73
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications ........................... 74
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions ........ 75
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 75
Traffic Annunciation .................................................... 75
TAWS Annunciations ................................................... 76
Altitude Alerting ......................................................... 77
Low Altitude Annunciation .......................................... 77
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting ...... 78
2.4 Abnormal Operations ........................................... 79
Abnormal GPS Conditions ........................................... 79
Unusual Attitudes ....................................................... 80
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS Display .............................................................. 82
3.2 Engine Page............................................................ 85
Fuel Calculations ........................................................ 89
Ice Protection Systems ................................................ 91
3.3 Leaning Assist Mode ............................................. 94
3.4 EIS Display in Reversionary Mode ....................... 95
System Display ........................................................... 96
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview ................................................................ 99
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display ................... 100
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls .................................. 102
Control Unit ............................................................. 104
4.2 COM Operation .................................................... 106
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation ................... 106
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning ................................ 107
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz .................. 108
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency ................................ 109
Frequency Spacing .................................................... 113
Automatic Squelch .................................................... 114
Volume .................................................................... 114
4.3 NAV Operation ..................................................... 115
NAV Radio Selection and Activation ........................... 115
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning ..................................... 116
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD ............... 117
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation . 121
Marker Beacon Receiver ............................................ 122
DME Tuning ............................................................. 123
4.4 GTX 32/GTX 33 Transponder .............................. 124
Transponder Controls ................................................ 124
Transponder Mode Selection ...................................... 125
Entering a Transponder Code ..................................... 127
IDENT Function ........................................................ 129
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions ..................... 130
Power-Up ................................................................. 130
Mono/Stereo Headsets .............................................. 130
Speaker ................................................................... 130
Intercom .................................................................. 130
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. Aviii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Passenger Address (PA) System .................................. 132
Clearance Recorder and Player ................................... 133
Entertainment Inputs ................................................ 134
Multifunction Controls .............................................. 135
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure ....................... 136
4.7 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 137
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation ................................. 137
Stuck Microphone ..................................................... 137
COM Tuning Failure ................................................... 137
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction ........................................................ 139
Navigation Status Box ............................................... 140
5.2 Using Map Displays ............................................. 142
Map Orientation ....................................................... 142
Map Range .............................................................. 144
Map Panning ............................................................ 146
Measuring Bearing and Distance ................................ 150
Topography .............................................................. 151
Map Symbols ........................................................... 154
Airways ................................................................... 160
Track Vector ............................................................. 162
Wind Vector ............................................................. 163
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 164
Fuel Range Ring ....................................................... 165
Field of View (SVS) .................................................... 166
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc ................................... 167
Destination Airport Information ................................. 168
5.3 Waypoints ............................................................. 169
Airports ................................................................... 170
Intersections ............................................................ 177
NDBs ....................................................................... 179
VORs ....................................................................... 181
User Waypoints ........................................................ 183
5.4 Airspaces .............................................................. 189
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation .......................................... 193
5.6 Flight Planning ..................................................... 198
Flight Plan Creation .................................................. 199
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan ................ 204
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan ................................. 207
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan .................. 210
Flight Plan Storage ................................................... 217
Flight Plan Editing .................................................... 219
Along Track Offsets ................................................... 223
Parallel Track ............................................................ 225
Activating a Flight Plan Leg ....................................... 228
Inverting a Flight Plan ............................................... 229
Flight Plan Views ...................................................... 230
Closest Point of FPL .................................................. 232
5.7 Vertical Navigation ............................................. 233
Altitude Constraints .................................................. 235
5.8 Procedures ........................................................... 239
Departures ............................................................... 239
Arrivals ................................................................... 242
Approaches ............................................................. 244
5.9 Trip Planning ........................................................ 250
Trip Planning ............................................................ 250
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 254
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan ..................................... 257
5.12 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 285
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 XM Satellite Weather .......................................... 287
Activating Services .................................................... 288
Using XM Satellite Weather Products .......................... 289
6.2 Stormscope Lightning ......................................... 317
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map ........... 317
Selecting the Stormscope Page .................................. 321
6.3 Terrain Proximity ................................................. 323
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data ............................... 324
Terrain Proximity Page ............................................... 326
6.4 Terrain-SVS ........................................................... 328
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data ....................................... 329
Terrain-SVS Page ...................................................... 332
Terrain-SVS Alerts ..................................................... 334
System Status ........................................................... 337
6.5 TAWS-B ................................................................. 338
Displaying TAWS-B Data ............................................ 339
TAWS-B Page ........................................................... 342
TAWS-B Alerts .......................................................... 344
System Status ........................................................... 350
6.6 Profile View Terrain ............................................. 352
Profile View Display .................................................. 352
6.7 Garmin GTS 800 Traffic ....................................... 354
Theory of operation .................................................. 354
TAS Alerts ................................................................ 358
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
System Test .............................................................. 359
Operation ................................................................ 360
System Status .......................................................... 367
6.8 Avidyne TAS610 Traffic ............................................. 368
TAS Symbology ......................................................... 368
Displaying Traffic Data .............................................. 368
Altitude Display ........................................................ 371
Traffic Map Page Display Range ................................. 371
TAS Alerts ................................................................ 373
System Status ........................................................... 374
6.9 L-3 Skywatch Traffic ............................................ 375
TAS Symbology ......................................................... 375
Operation ................................................................ 376
Displaying Traffic Data .............................................. 376
Altitude Display ........................................................ 379
Traffic Map Page Display Range ................................. 379
TAS Alerts ................................................................ 381
System Status ........................................................... 381
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 GFC 700 (Optional) .............................................. 383
GFC 700 Controls ..................................................... 384
Flight Director Operation ........................................... 386
Vertical Modes ......................................................... 389
Lateral Modes .......................................................... 404
Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation ........................ 412
Example Flight Plan .................................................. 415
AFCS Annunciations and Alerts .................................. 429
Overspeed Protection ................................................ 430
Underspeed Protection .............................................. 430
7.2 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional) ............432
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 Synthetic Vision System (SVS) ........................... 434
SVS Operation .......................................................... 435
SVS Features ............................................................ 437
Field of View ............................................................ 446
8.2 Enhanced Vision System (EVS) ........................... 448
Image Quality and Interpretation ............................... 448
EVS Softkeys ............................................................ 448
8.3 SafeTaxi ................................................................ 451
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision .......................... 454
8.4 ChartView ............................................................. 457
ChartView Softkeys ................................................... 457
Terminal Procedures Charts ....................................... 458
Chart Options ........................................................... 466
Day/Night View ........................................................ 472
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date ............. 474
8.5 FliteCharts ............................................................ 477
FliteCharts Softkeys .................................................. 477
Terminal Procedures Charts ....................................... 478
Chart Options ........................................................... 485
Day/Night View ........................................................ 488
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date ............. 490
8.6 AOPA Airport Directory ....................................... 493
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision ............... 493
8.7 XM Radio Entertainment .................................... 495
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services ........................ 495
Using XM Radio ....................................................... 497
8.8 Scheduler .............................................................. 500
8.9 Electronic Checklists ........................................... 502
8.10 Flight Data Logging ............................................ 505
8.11 Hypoxia Recognition with Automatic Descent
Mode ............................................................................... 507
Determining Pilot Alertness ....................................... 507
Automatic Descent Mode .......................................... 508
8.12 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) ....... 509
Operation ................................................................ 510
8.13 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 512
SVS Troubleshooting ................................................. 512
Reversionary Mode ................................................... 512
Unusual Attitudes ..................................................... 513
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts ............................................. 515
Alert Level Definitions ............................................... 517
Aircraft Alerts ........................................................... 518
Perspective
™
Voice Alerts ........................................... 521
GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System Voice Alerts ............... 522
System Annunciations ............................................... 522
System Message Advisories ....................................... 525
GFC 700 AFCS Alerts ................................................. 535
GFC 700 Speed Condition/Stall Alert ........................... 536
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. Ax
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Terrain-SVS Alerts ..................................................... 536
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations ......................... 538
Flight plan Import/Export Messages ........................... 539
Database Management ................................................ 541
Garmin Databases .................................................... 541
Jeppesen Databases .................................................. 542
Automatic Database Synchronization ......................... 543
Loading Updated Databases ...................................... 545
Glossary .......................................................................... 553
Frequently Asked Questions ........................................ 559
Map Symbols ................................................................. 563
INDEX
Index ................................................................................I-1
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
•
GDU 1240A
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
•
GDU 1240A
Multi Function Display (MFD)
•
GDU 1040A
Primary Flight Display (optional)
•
GDU 1040A
Multi Function Display (optional)
•
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
•
GDC 74A
Air Data Computer (ADC)
•
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe Unit
•
GRS 77
Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
•
GMU 44
Magnetometer
•
GMA 347
Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
•
GTX 32
Transponder
•
GTX 33 Mode S
Transponder (option without
TIS-A)
•
GTX 33 Mode S
Transponder with Extended
Squitter (option without TIS-A)
•
GDL 69/69A
Satellite Data Link Receiver (optional)
•
GRC 10
Remote Control (option with GDL 69A)
•GRT 10 XM Radio Remote Transceiver (option with
GDL 69A)
•
GCU 478
PFD/MFD Control Unit
•
GMC 705
AFCS Control Unit (if GFC 700 is
installed)
•
GTP 59
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
•
GSA 80
AFCS Yaw Servo (if GFC 700 is installed)
• GSA81
AFCS Pitch and Roll Servos (if GFC 700 is
installed)
•GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter (if GFC 700 is installed)
•
GSM 85/86
Servo Gearboxes (if GFC 700 is
installed)
A top-level system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GSM 85, GTA 82, GRC 10,
or GRT 10).
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
The optional GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot
(AP), yaw damper (YD - optional), and manual electric trim (MET) functions.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
•
GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30
(1) – This unit is configured as a PFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with
1024 x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20 (MFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
•
GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20
(1) – This unit is configured as a MFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024
x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the right/copilot side is designated as MFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30 (PFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
•
GIA 63W
(2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director
(FD; if GFC 700 is installed) and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side
display via an HSDB connection. The GIA 63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each
other directly.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
•
GDC 74A
(1 or 2) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information
to the system, and it communicates with the primary GIA 63W, GDU 1240A and GRS 77, using an ARINC 429
digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the primary GTP 59).
•
GEA 71
(1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GRS 77
(1 or 2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both GDUs and the primary GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the primary GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field
information, with the GDC 74A to obtain air data, and with both GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS
modes of operation are discussed later in this document.
•
GMU 44
(1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data to the GRS 77 for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77, using an RS-485 digital interface.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
4
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
•
GMA 347
(1) – The Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom and marker beacon controls
(refer to the Audio Panel & CNS Section). This unit communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using an RS-232
digital interface.
•
GTX 32
(1)
or GTX 33
(1)
or GTX 33 with Extended Squitter
(1) – The GTX 32 solid-state transponder
provides Modes A and C capability. The GTX 33 solid-state transponder provides Modes A, B, and S capability.
The GTX 33 may also also be additionally be equipped with Extended Squitter (ES) transmit capability. The
transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder communicates with the primary GIA 63W
through an RS-232 digital interface.
•
GTS 800
(1) – The optional GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the
inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection. The GTS 800
also has an analog audio connection to the GMA 347.
•
GDL 69/69A
(1) – The optional Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to
the MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69/69A
communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is
required to enable the GDL 69/69A capability.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
•
GCU 478
(1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS) controls for the PFD and MFD through an
RS-232 digital interface.
•
GMC 705
(1) – Provides the controls for the GFC 700 AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with the PFD and MFD.
•
GTP 59
(1 or 2) – The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the primary GDC
74A.
•
GSA 80
(1),
GSA 81
(2), and
GSM 85A/86
(3) – The GSA 80 servo is used for the automatic control of yaw,
while the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with each
GIA 63W. The GSM 85A/86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81
servo actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
•
GTA 82
(1) – The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA 63W and GSA 81 to control the
DC motor to drive the aircraft trim system.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
6
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 1-1 Perspective™ System (LRU Configuration)
GDU 1040A
(PFD)
GDU 1040A
(MFD)
GIA63W #2
GSA80
GSA81
GSA 82
(Pitch Trim)
GRS77#1
GIA 63W #1
GMC 705
GMU44#1
GEA71#1
GDC 74A #1
GTP59#1
GMA 347
GCU 478
GDL 69/69A
GRS77#2
GMU44#2
GDC 74A #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
G/S
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
G/S
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GDU 1240A GDU 1240A
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
GTP 59 #2
(optional)
(Pitch & Roll)
(Yaw)
(optional)
GTX 32/33/
33 w/ ES
GTS 800
(optional)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 347) and AFCS controls (GMC 705) are described in the Audio Panel & CNS
and AFCS sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, PFD/MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and
audio panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
9
2
1
5
4
6
8
7
3
11
12
10
13
PFD
13
MFD
14
15 16
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
8
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
1
COM Frequency Transfer Key
– Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
2
COM
VOL/SQ Knob
– Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
3
Dual COM Knob
– Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow between COM1 and COM2.
4
BARO Knob
– Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
5
Joystick
– Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
6
MENU Key
– Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key
– Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key
– Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob
– Flight Management System Knob. Press the
FMS
Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large
knobs. The large
knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small
knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
10
CLR
Key
– Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key
– Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key ( )
– Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
13
Bezel
Keys
– Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual
NAV Knob
– Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob
– Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key
– Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PFD/MFD CONTROL UNIT
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478). The
following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit:
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478)
3452 789
18 17
10
1
19
11
13
12
14
21
20
1516
6
1
CLR
Key
– Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
2
FPL Key
– Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
3
Direct-to Key ( )
– Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
4
MENU Key
– Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
5
PROC Key
– Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
6
ENT Key
– Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
FMS/XPDR/COM/NAV Key
– Acts as the FMS Knob for the MFD. Sets the transponder code when in
XPDR mode. Acts as the COM Knob when in COM tuning mode. Acts as the N AV Knob when in NAV
tuning mode.
8
FM
S Key
– Selects/deselects FMS mode.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
10
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
9
COM
Key
– Selects/deselects COM tuning mode.
10
XPDR Key
– Selects/deselects XPDR mode.
11
NAV Key
– Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode.
12
Joystick
– Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down.
13
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG)
– Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5
MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
14
Alphanumeric Keys
– Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the
FMS
Knob. When the Quick Select Box is shown on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD,
alphanumeric keys can be used to enter data into the Quick Select Box area.
15
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key
– Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
16
Decimal Key
– Enters a decimal point.
17
BKSP Key
– Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
SPC Key
– Adds a space character.
19
ALT SEL Knob
– Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box. Pressing this knob synchronizes
the selected altitude to the current altitude. In addition to providing the standard altitude alerter function,
selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS. The Selected
Altitude Range Arc (when enabled), which appears on navigation maps during climbs or descents, is also
based on the selected altitude setting.
20
CRS Knob
– Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is selected.
Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected course provides course
reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
21
HDG Knob
– Sets the selected heading on the HSI. Pressing this knob synchronizes the heading bug to
the current heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference
to the flight director.
AFCS CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
810 912 11
Figure 1-4 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NOTE: If a key is selected, its respective annunciator is illuminated.
The GFC 700 AFCS is mainly controlled through the GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit. The AFCS Control Unit
consists of the following controls:
1
HDG Key
– Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
2
NAV Key
– Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
3
AP Key
– Engages/disengages the autopilot.
4
LVL Key
– Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot
engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes.
NOTE: The LVL Key will not engage the autopilot when Automatic Descent Mode (ADM) is active.
5
NOSE UP/DN Wheel
– Controls the active mode reference for the Pitch, Vertical Speed, and Indicated
Airspeed modes.
6
IAS Key
– Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode.
7
ALT Key
– Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
8
VNV Key
– Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode.
9
VS Key
– Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
10
YD Key (optional)
– Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
11
FD Key
– Activates/deactivates the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. If the autopilot is
engaged, the
FD
Key is disabled.
12
APR Key
– Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
The
AP DISC
(Autopilot Disconnect) Switch,
GA (Go Around)
Button, and
MET (Manual Electric Trim) Switch
are additional AFCS
controls and are located in the cockpit, separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are
discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
12
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
Figure 1-5 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
25
17 181513
11 20
14 1612 22 24232119
10
8642 3 5 7 91
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
1
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
2
MKR/MUTE
– Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio and allows music mute option.
3
COM1
– When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2
– When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3
– Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1
– When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
7
NAV2
– When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME
– Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF
– Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY
– Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the
MKR/MUTE
Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT
Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
12
PILOT Volume
– Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
13
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
14
SENS
– Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
15
HI SENS
Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
16
COM1 MIC
– Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC
– Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC
– Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2
– Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR
– Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL
– Not used.
22
COPLT
– Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT
– Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume
– Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS
Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
14
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Figure 1-6 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
Softkey
On
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press) Softkey Names
(Displayed)
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.
PFD SOFTKEYS
The
CDI
,
IDENT
,
TMR/REF
,
NRST,
and
ALERTS
softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather data (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to
the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
INSET XPDR IDENT
TMR/REF NRST ALERTS OBS PFD
CDI
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
(optional)
SENSOR DME
BACK
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ALERTS
SENSOR
ADC1 AHRS1
ADC2 AHRS2
BACK
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
TOPO ALERTS
NEXRAD
(optional)
TERRAIN XM LTNG
(optional)
OFF TRAFFIC
INSET
TRFC-2
TRFC-1
STRMSCP
(optional)
METAR
(optional)
Figure 1-7 Top Level PFD Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
•INSET Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
OFF Removes Inset Map
DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except active flight plan
TRAFFIC (2) Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Displays traffic on Inset Map.
TRFC-2: Removes everything except traffic.
TOPO Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TERRAIN Displays/removes terrain information on Inset Map
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
NEXRAD Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
METAR Displays/removes METAR weather information on Inset Map (optional)
INSET XPDR IDENT
TMR/REF NRST ALERTS OBS PFD
CDI
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
(optional)
SENSOR DME
BACK
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ALERTS
SENSOR
ADC1 AHRS1
ADC2 AHRS2
BACK
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
TOPO ALERTS
NEXRAD
(optional)
TERRAIN XM LTNG
(optional)
OFF TRAFFIC
INSET
TRFC-2
TRFC-1
STRMSCP
(optional)
METAR
(optional)
Figure 1-8 INSET Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
16
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
•SENSOR Displays second-level softkeys for ADC and AHRS sensors
ADC1 Selects ADC1
ADC2 Selects ADC2 (optional)
AHRS1 Selects AHRS1
AHRS2 Selects AHRS2 (optional)
INSET XPDR IDENT
TMR/REF NRST ALERTS OBS PFD
CDI
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
(optional)
SENSOR DME
BACK
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ALERTS
SENSOR
ADC1 AHRS1
ADC2 AHRS2
BACK
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
TOPO ALERTS
NEXRAD
(optional)
TERRAIN XM LTNG
(optional)
OFF TRAFFIC
INSET
TRFC-2
TRFC-1
STRMSCP
(optional)
METAR
(optional)
Figure 1-9 SENSOR Softkeys
•PFD Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
SYN VIS Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features (optional)
PATHWAY Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
SYN TERR
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
HRZN HDG
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
APTSIGNS Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within approximately
9nm.
DFLTS Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
WIND Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
OPTN1 Displays wind direction arrow with true numeric direction and speed
OPTN2 Displays headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
OFF Removes wind information from display
DME Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
BRG Displays the Bearing Information Window and cycles through:
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
Off: Removes window
HSI FMT Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
360 HSI Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
ARC HSI Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information window unavailable)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ALT UNIT Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays to
metric units
METERS Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when selected
IN Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
HPA Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
STD BARO Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
•OBS Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
•CDI Cycles CDI through GPS, NAV1 (VOR/LOC), and NAV2 (VOR/LOC) navigation
sources
•DME Displays/removes the DME Radio Tuning Window (optional)
Figure 1-10 PFD Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
18
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
•XPDR Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
STBY Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
ON Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
ALT Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations)
GND Manually selects Ground Mode (Transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C
replies, but does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations)
VFR Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
CODE Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
0 — 7 Use numbers to enter code
BKSP Removes numbers entered, one at a time
•IDENT Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen
•TMR/REF Displays/removes Timer/References Window
•NRST Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
•ALERTS Displays/removes Alerts Window
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the IDENT or BACK
Softkey to return to the top-
level softkeys.
XPDR
STBY ON ALT VFR IDENT BACK ALERTSCODE
IDENT BACK ALERTS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BKSP
GND
STD BARO
BACK ALERTS
WIND HSI FMT
PFD
Press the STD BARO or BACK
Softkey to return to the top-level
softkeys.
ALT UNIT
HPA BACK ALERTS
METERS IN
DFLTS
Press the BRGsoftkeys
to display/remove
the Bearing Information
window and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
- ADF (optional)
BACK ALERTS
OPTN1 OPTN2
DME
(optional)
BACK ALERTS
360 HSI ARC HSI
BRG
OFF
Figure 1-11 XPDR Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
MFD SOFTKEYS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
•ENGINE Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the
Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
ANTI-ICE Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (TKS FIKI is optional. See Operational Note above)
LEFT Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
AUTO Selects auto tank mode
RIGHT Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
DCLTR Removes bars and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
ASSIST Identifies temperature peaks
CO RST Resets the CO Guardian
FUEL Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
FULL Resets fuel totalizer to full (usable fuel)
TABS Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
UNDO Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
ENTER Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Figure 1-12 MFD Softkeys (EIS)
MAP
ENGINE
CHKLIST
DCLTR
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
SHW CHRT
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
(Optional)
FULL TABS
ENGINE FUEL
ASSIST CO RST
ENGINE
DCLTR
ENTER
UNDO
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
BACK
ENGINE FUEL
ASSIST CO RST
ENGINE
DCLTR
ANTI-ICE
(Optional)
UNDO
FULL TABS ENTER
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its second-
level softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
LEFT
(Optional)
AUTO
(Optional)
RIGHT
(Optional)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
20
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
•MAP Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
TRAFFIC Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
PROFILE Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
TOPO Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
TERRAIN Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
AIRWAYS Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope lightning information on the Navigation Map (optional)
NEXRAD Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
METAR Displays/removes METAR weather information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
LEGEND Displays/removes XM weather product legend on Navigation Map Page. Softkey available
when one or more XM weather products are enabled for display (optional)
BACK Returns to top-level softkeys
•DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
•SHWCHRT Displays optional Flite Charts or Chart View charts (optional)
•CHKLIST Displays the Checklist Page (optional)
DONE Selects the highlighted checklist item
EXIT Returns to the top-level softkeys
EMERGCY Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 1-13 MFD Softkeys (Navigation Map and Checklist)
(optional)
CHKLIST
DCLTR
ENGINE
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
MAP
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is alread
y
checked.
EXIT DONE ENGINE EMERGCY
BACK TOPO
(optional)
NEXRAD
TRAFFIC
TERRAIN METAR LEGEND
(optional) (optional)
XM LTNG
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY LO
AIRWY HI
AIRWY ON
AIRWAYS
SHW CHRT
STRMSCP
(optional)
PROFILE
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
22
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE:
Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE:
Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Install an SD card:
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card:
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
Figure 1-14 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
PFD MFD
SD Card Slots
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
1.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
The Perspective™ system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from
electrical busses. The PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in
test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-15. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-16), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
•Systemversion
•Copyright
•Landdatabasenameandversion
•SafeTaxidatabaseinformation
•Terraindatabasenameandversion
•Obstacledatabasenameandversion
•Navigation database name, version, and effective
dates
•AirportDirectoryname,versionandeffectivedates
•FliteCharts/ChartViewdatabaseinformation
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the
ENT
Key
acknowledges this information and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon
pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a
position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-15 PFD Initialization Figure 1-16 MFD Power-up Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
24
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the PFD. This section discusses the normal and reversionary
modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the system.
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE:
In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD, or from any display
operating in reversionary mode.
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). The PFD offers control for COM frequency selection and the MFD offers control
for NAV frequency selection. The PFD/MFD Control Unit offers control for both COM and NAV frequency
selection.
Figure 1-17 Normal Operation
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all essential flight information from the PFD is combined with the EIS and presented on
the display operating in Reversionary Mode. EIS operation while in Reversionary Mode is discussed in the EIS
Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning, nearest airports, and procedures
are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red
DISPLAY BACKUP
Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
DISPLAY BACKUP
Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
Figure 1-18 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
26
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-19 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). The system alerts the pilot when
backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Upon power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment
begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument
remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GRS 77 AHRS
OR GMU 44
Magnetometer
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
GTX 32/33/33 ES Transponder
OR GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Units
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
Figure 1-19 System Failure Annunciations
Navigation Database
Mismatch in PFD
and MFD
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SYSTEM STATUS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Cirrus service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
Figure 1-20 Example AUX - System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
Pressing the SYNC DBS Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) activates
the Automatic Database Synchronization feature. When this feature is active, databases are updated automatically
in the MFD and PFD from one SD card. For a detailed discussion on database synchronization, see the SD Card
Use section in the Appendices.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
28
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering in reversionary mode can degrade AHRS accuracy.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the system, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information from its
internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate
combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
Attitude/Heading Invalid
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
AHRS Normal
Operation
AHRS no-
Mag Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
available
available
unavailable
unavailable
available
unavailable
unavailable
available
Air Data
Magnetometer Data
unavailable
available
GPS Data
Magnetometer Data
Air Data
Figure 1-21 AHRS Operation
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer
to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in
loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading
information.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD.
In some circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution
is automatically coupled to the PFD. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” are then displayed in the
Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers
are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX - GPS Status Page.
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired
GPS
Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
30
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
GPS Receiver
Status
Figure 1-22 GPS Status Page
Satellite Constellation
Diagram Satellite Signal
Information
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
•Satelliteconstellationdiagram
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
•Satellitesignalinformationstatus
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
•GPSreceiverstatus
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
•RAIM(ReceiverAutonomousIntegrityMonitoring)Prediction(RAIM Softkey is pressed)
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the
FMS
Knob
. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
32
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.6 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
Or:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.
b) Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The system
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specied waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specied waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the
FMS
Knob
. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specied waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specied waypoint, time, and date
•SBASSelection(SBAS Softkey is pressed) (WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS capable systems only)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Disabling WAAS, EGNOS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the
FMS
Knob
, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Figure 1-23 Enable/Disable SBAS
•GPSSatelliteSignalStrengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
34
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1.6 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
The system has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Figure 1-24 Page Menu Examples
No Options for
NRST Window
Options for FPL Window
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom. The titles of pages available in
the group are displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the
group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure
Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
Figure 1-25 Page Title and Page Groups
Page Group Active Page Title
MFD
Page Groups
Pages in
Current
Group
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2)
Turn
the
small FMS
Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
36
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 1-26 Map Pages
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
Stormscope (optional)
XM Weather Data Link
(service optional)
Terrain Proximity/
TERRAIN-SVS (optional)/
TAWS-B (optional)
Figure 1-27 Waypoint Pages
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup Pages
XM Satellite pages (optional)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
System Status
Video
Figure 1-28 Auxiliary Pages
XM
Satellite
Pages
Figure 1-29 Nearest Pages
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
38
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, the Flight Plan Pages can also
be accessed using the FPL Key on the PFD/MFD Control Unit. Main pages within this group are then selected
by pressing the FMS Key and turning the FMS Knobs. In some instances, softkeys may be used to access the
Procedure Pages.
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
or
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
Figure 1-30 Flight Plan Pages
Narrow and
Wide View
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the PFD/MFD Control Unit by pressing the PROC Key.
A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading
Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
Figure 1-31 Procedure Pages
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
39
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be changed:
•Date/time
•DisplayUnits
(see Flight Instruments Section)
•BaroTransitionalert(seeFlightInstruments
Section)
•Airspacealerts(seeFlightManagementSection)
•AudioAlerts
•PageNavigation
•MFDNavigationStatusBoxelds
(see Flight Management Section)
•CDIscalingforGPSnavigationsource
(see Flight Instruments Section)
•COMchannelspacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
•Criteriafordisplayingnearestairports
(see Flight Management Section)
•ElectronicStability&Protectionenable/disable
(see AFCS Section)
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
Figure 1-32 AUX - System Setup Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
40
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DATE/TIME
The system obtains the current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-22). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set
by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
Figure 1-33 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
PFD
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
Figure 1-34 Date/Time Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
41
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
Figure 1-35 Display Unit Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Category Settings Affected Quantities Exceptions
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North)
True (North)
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Speed
Metric
Nautical
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS-B Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet
Meters
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Temperature Celsius
Fahrenheit
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Gallons
Liters
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page) Engine Indication System (EIS)
Weight Pounds
Kilograms
N/A N/A
Position HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All positions N/A
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
42
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
PILOT PROFILES
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-16). The system can store up to 25 profiles; the
currently active profile, the number of profiles used, and the number of profiles available are shown at the top
of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted.
Figure 1-36 Pilot Profiles
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
43
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
44
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
PAGE NAVIGATION
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the Page Group
Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX - System Setup
Page.
OFF – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of the large FMS Knob.
ON – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of the large FMS Knob.
The pilot can select, from the AUX - System Setup Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page navigation Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 1-37 Page Navigation Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
45
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TIMERS
The system timers available include:
•Stopwatch-likegenerictimers(availablefromthePFDTimer/ReferencesWindowandontheMFDAUX-
Utility Page)
•Total-time-in-ighttimer(MFDAUX-UtilityPage)
•Timesincedeparture(MFDAUX-UtilityPage)
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
2) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the
ENT
Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the
small FMS
Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the
ENT
Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the
CLR
Key or the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
Figure 1-38 Generic Timer (Timer/References Window)
PFD
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
46
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the
ENT
Key.
5) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the
ENT
Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
Figure 1-39 Timers
(AUX - Utility Page)
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the
small FMS
Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the
ENT
Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the
MENU
Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
47
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the
small FMS
Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the
ENT
Key.
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the
MENU
Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the
ENT
Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
48
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The dimming bus is the primary source for backlighting adjustments of the PFD and MFD displays, bezel, Audio
Panel keys, AFCS Control Unit keys, and PFD/MFD Control Unit keys. The automatic backlighting adjustment
for the AFCS Control Unit annunciators and PFD/MFD Control Unit annunciators uses photocell technology to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize
display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can
be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimming bus or the following procedures. In normal
operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display.
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD
MENU
Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the
small FMS
Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
3) Press the
ENT
Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the
ENT
Key.
5) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
6) To remove the menu, press the
CLR
or
MENU
Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD
MENU
Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
3) Turn the
small FMS
Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the
small FMS
Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the
ENT
Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the
ENT
Key.
8) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
9) Turn the
small FMS
Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
10) To remove the menu, press the
CLR
or
MENU
Key.
Figure 1-40 PFD Setup Menu
PFD
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
49
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easy-
to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
•AirspeedIndicator,showing
– Indicated Airspeed
– True Airspeed
– Reference flags
– Airspeed awareness ranges
•AttitudeIndicatorwithslip/skid
indication
•Altimeter,showing
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude
•VerticalDeviation,Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
•VerticalSpeedIndicator(VSI)
•VerticalNavigationindications
•OutsideAirTemperature(OAT)
•DMETuningWindow
•Winddata
•Systemtime
•InsetMap
•HorizontalSituationIndicator,
showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Bearing pointer and
information window
– DME Information Window
– Navigation source
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
50
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1
Percent Power Box
2
Airspeed Indicator
3
True Airspeed
4
Current Heading
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
6
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
8
Softkeys
9
System Time
10
Transponder Status Box
11
Selected Heading Bug
12
Turn Rate Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
15
Selected Altitude Bug
16
Altimeter
17
Selected Altitude
18
COM Frequency Box
19
Navigation Status Box
20
AFCS Status Box
21
Slip/Skid Indicator
22
Attitude Indicator
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
10
1
2021
2
3
9
12
14
19
13
16
15
17
18
5
6
4
7
11
22
8
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
51
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
1
Traffic Annunciation
2
Selected Heading
3
Wind Data
4
Inset Map
5
DME Information Window
6
Bearing Information Window
7
Selected Course
8
Barometric Minimums Box
9
Flight Plan Window
10
Annunciation Window
11
Current Vertical Speed
12
Required Vertical Speed Indicator
13
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
14
VNV Target Altitude
15
Terrain Annunciation
16
AFCS Status Annunciation
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
2
7
3
1
4
56
9
14
8
10
12
16
11
13
15
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
52
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 56 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching the never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it turns red.
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
Low Speed Range Red and White
Barber Pole at V
NE
True
Airspeed
Speed
Ranges
Indicated
Airspeed
Operating Ranges
Airspeed
Trend
Vector Vspeed
References
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available in SR22 models.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
53
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the indicated airspeed number changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if
any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) flags can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is categorized
as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed flags changes are retained when power is cycled.
NOTE: V
X
and V
Y
can only be modified on the SR22.
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
3) Turn the
small FMS
Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the
CLR
Key or the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menus
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff).
Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
2) Press the
MENU
Key.
3) To activate all Vspeed flags, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the
ENT
Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
2) Press the
MENU
Key.
3) Turn the
FMS
Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the
ENT
Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
54
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
5
6
8
7
2
4
3
9
1
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and
7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVS.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. When the optional Electronic Stability
and Protection (ESP) system is available, double ticks marks also appear on the roll scale; refer to the Additional
Features section for more information about ESP indications. Angle of bank is shown by the position of the
pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid
Indicator.
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
55
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
When a Selected Altitude is set, a light blue Selected Altitude Intercept Arc (if enabled) is displayed on the
navigation maps when the aircraft is climbing or descending. This arc appears at the estimated position the
aircraft will intercept the Selected Altitude; refer to the Flight Management Section for additional information
about the Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Turn the
ALT SEL
Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
When meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments.
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
Barometric
Setting
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Selected
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
56
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the
BACK
Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the
BACK
Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
57
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude (in either direction). This is displayed by the barometric pressure setting flashing light blue
when crossing the transition altitude. The flashing stops when the barometric pressure setting is changed.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ON or OFF in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
5) With the altitude field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to set desired altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
58
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at
1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 fpm.
The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent
exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the
pointer.
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-10) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental
Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-10) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer
to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFDs.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond acts as
the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet.
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
Figure 2-12 Glidepath IndicatorFigure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
59
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond bug. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the
PFD
Softkey.
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the
360 HSI
or
ARC HSI
Softkey.
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
Figure 2-13 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
1
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
2
Current Track Indicator
3
Course Deviation Indicator
4
Navigation Source
5
To/From Indicator
6
Course Pointer
7
Rotating Compass Rose
8
Lateral Deviation Scale
9
Aircraft Symbol
10
Flight Phase
11
Selected Heading Bug
12
Lubber Line
13
Current Heading
14
Turn Rate Indicator
11
8
7
6
4
3
9
1
13 12
10
2
5
14
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
60
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Course
Pointer
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Navigation
Source
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Figure 2-14 ARC HSI
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the
HDG
Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the
CRS
Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Track
Indicator
Selected
Heading Selected
Course
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
Current
Heading
Heading Bug
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
61
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
 •TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
 •MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
62
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTER AND INFORMATION WINDOW
One bearing pointer and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources. The pointer is a light blue single-line arrow (BRG); an icon is shown in the respective information
window to indicate the pointer. The bearing pointer never override the CDI and is visually separated from
the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointer is selected but not necessarily visible due to data
unavailability).
Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
Bearing Information Window
Pointer
Icon
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
Bearing
Pointer
Frequency
Tuning Mode
Distance
Station
Identifier
DME Information Window
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
63
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
•Bearingsource(NAV,GPS)
• Pointericon(BRG=singleline)
•Frequency(NAV,ADF)
•Station/waypointidentier(NAV,GPS)
•GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
•TheNAVradioisnotreceivingthetunedVORstation
•GPSisthebearingsourceandanactivewaypointisnotselected
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the BRG Softkey to display the bearing pointer and information window with NAV1 source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to NAV2.
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to GPS.
5) Press the BRG Softkey a fourth time to change the bearing source to ADF (ADF Radio installation is optional).
6) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
64
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI Scale
Navigation
Source
CDI Crosstrack
Error
Scale
Flight
Phase
360˚ HSI
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC); the Selected Course readout also follows
these color indications. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI.
If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error
(XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
65
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left
corner of the MFD is light blue.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The NAV2 standby frequency in
the upper left corner of the MFD is light blue.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source
Pressing the
CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
GPS
Selected
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
•AlocalizerorILSapproachhasbeenloadedintotheactiveightplan
•TheFinalApproachFix(FAF)istheactiveleg,theFAFislessthan15nmaway,andtheaircraftismoving
toward the FAF
•Avalidlocalizerfrequencyhasbeentuned
•TheGPSCDIdeviationislessthan1.2timesfull-scaledeection
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
66
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the full-
scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and
the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation. Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phases.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-23 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-24, Table 2-1).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
67
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 2-24 Automatic CDI Scaling
2.0 nm
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
0.3 nm
Missed
Approach
1.0 nm
Approach
1.0 nm
Te rminal
1.0 nm
Te rminal
0.3 nm
Departure
CDI Full-scale Deflection
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
•Onceadepartureprocedureisactivated,theCDIisscaledfordeparture (0.3 nm).
•Thesystemswitchesfromdeparturetoterminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
•At30nmfromthedepartureairporttheenroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
•Ifaftercompletingthedepartureprocedurethenearestairportismorethan200nmawayfromtheaircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
•Within31nmofthedestinationairport(terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active arrival route, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change until the
aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrive route (if within 31 nm from the destination airport).
•Duringapproach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-25 and 2-26). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
68
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
1.0 nm
2 nm
350 ft
angle set
by system
0.3 nm
FA F
CDI Full-scale Deflection
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
1.0 nm
2 nm
FA F
0.3 nm
course width
Landing
Threshold
CDI Full-scale Deflection
angle based
on database
information
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
•Whenamissed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
•Thesystemautomaticallyswitchesbacktoterminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
-
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase Annunciation* Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
Departure DPRT 0.3 nm
Terminal TERM 1.0 nm
Enroute ENR 2.0 nm
Oceanic OCN 2.0 nm
Approach
(Non-precision) LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-25)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
LNAV + V
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV) L/VNAV 1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-26)
Approach
(LPV) LPV
Missed Approach MAPR 0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
69
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
Figure 2-27 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Pressing the
OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Extended
Course
Line
GPS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the
OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
70
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn a CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press a CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The
OBS
Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-28. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
Pressing the
SUSP
Softkey Suspends
Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
Figure 2-28 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
SUSP
Annunciation
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
71
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode. It may also be displayed in
degrees Fahrenheit from the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
Figure 2-29 Outside Air Temperature
Reversionary Mode
Normal Display
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
72
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-30 Temperature Selection
(AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
73
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways.
Figure 2-31 Wind Data
No Data
Option 1
Option 2
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
 •OPTN 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
 •OPTN 2: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
74
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNV Target
Altitude
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 2-32 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
Top of Descent Message
Criteria
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Speed (RVSI)
Vertical
Deviation (VDI)
VNV Target
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change X X X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD) X X X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
X X X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude X X X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit X X X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed X X
* If the flight director has been engaged to fly a VNV flight plan, the VNV Target Altitude being held remains displayed
while on level flight plan legs.
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
75
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations
Inner MarkerMiddle MarkerOuter Marker
Altimeter
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
The Perspective
™
system displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page
(MFD), and various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more details about the
optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically
occurs:
•ThePFDInsetMapisenabled,displayingtrafc
•A ashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation (Figure 2-34) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
•Anaural traffic alert may be generated. Refer to the applicable traffic advisory system (TAS) documentation
for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
Figure 2-34 Traffic Annunciation
Figure 2-35 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
Traffic
Symbol
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
76
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of the
Altimeter (also where the marker beacon annunciations appear). Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and
Appendix for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.
Figure 2-36 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
77
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the GFC 700 AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
•Uponpassingthrough1000feetoftheSelectedAltitude,theSelectedAltitude(shownabovetheAltimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
•Whentheaircraftpasseswithin200ftoftheSelectedAltitude,theSelectedAltitudechangestolightbluetext
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds and a single chime is heard.
•AfterreachingtheSelectedAltitude,ifthepilotiesoutsidethedeviationband(±200feetoftheSelected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and the
word “Altitude” is heard.
Figure 2-37 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of ±200 ft
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
when SBAS is available. This annunciation is not shown for systems with TAWS or TERRAIN-SVS, unless
terrain alerting is inhibited..
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
Figure 2-38 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
Altimeter
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
78
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on
barometric altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter
and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is within the range of the
tape).
The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
•Whentheaircraftaltitudedescendstowithin2500feetoftheMDA/DHsetting,the‘BAROMIN’boxappears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
•Whentheaircraftpassesthrough100feetoftheMDA/DH,thebugandtextturnwhite.
•Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
Figure 2-39 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
MDA/DH
Setting
MDA/DH
Bug
Altitude ReachedWithin 100 feetWithin 2500 feet
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled.
Setting the Minimums Descent Altitude/Decision Height:
1) Press the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) To remove the window, press the
CLR
Key or the
TMR/REF
Softkey.
Figure 2-40 MDA/DH Setting (Timer/References Window)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
79
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see the
figure for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation Location Description
LOI Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
INTEG OK Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
DR Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-41 Example HSI Annunciations
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed in yellow on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. This data includes the
following:
•NavigationStatusBoxeldsexceptActiveLeg,TAS,andDTK
•CourseDeviationIndicator(removedafter20minutes)
•GPSBearingPointer
•WinddataandpointersintheWindDataBoxonthePFD
•TrackIndicator
•AllBearingPointerDistances
•ActiveFlightPlandistances,bearings,andETEvalues
Also, while the Perspective
™
system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and terrain alerting (if
installed) is disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
80
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Figure 2-42 Pitch Attitude Warnings
Nose High Nose Low
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
•TrafcAnnunciations
•AFCSAnnunciations
•FlightdirectorCommandBars
•InsetMap
•OutsideAirTemperature
•DMEInformationWindow
•Winddata
•SelectedHeadingBox
•SelectedCourseBox
•TransponderStatusBox
•SystemTime
•PFDSetupMenu
•Windowsdisplayedinthelower
right corner of the PFD:
– Timer/References
– Nearest Airports
– Flight Plan
– Alerts
– Procedures
– DME Tuning
•MinimumDescentAltitude/
Decision Height readout
•VerticalDeviation,Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
•AltimeterBarometricSetting
•SelectedAltitude
•VNVTargetAltitude
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
81
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, optional ice protection, and other
system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS information can be fully expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey. In
Reversionary Mode, the display-combines Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology with the EIS.
EIS Display
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR20)
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and
warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the safe
ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts, pointers and labels change color
corresponding to the level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at destination). If sensory data to an
instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red 'X' is displayed across the instrument. However the numeric
readouts in the Fuel Calculation Box, TKS FIKI Anti Ice Box (optional), and the density altitude in the Air Data
Box are replaced with dashes instead of red 'X's when the data is invalid or out of range.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A82
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may differ from
actual aircraft configurations.
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM) Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (Turbo models only – displays a light
blue target fuel flow indicator to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip,
shown in Figure 3-3)
5
Gallons Used Indicator
(Gal Used)
Displays the fuel used in gallons
6
Oil Temperature Indicator
(Oil ºF)
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
7
Oil Pressure Indicator
(Oil PSI)
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square inch
(psi)
8
Ammeter (Batt1 A) Displays the battery 1 load in amperes
9
Voltmeter (ESS Bus V) Displays the essential bus voltage in volts
10
Cylinder Head Temperature
Indicator (CHT ºF)
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT; cylinder
number is shown below bar)
11
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT ºF)
Exhaust Gas Temperature/
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Indicator (EGT/TIT ºF)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown below
bar) (naturally aspirated models only)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature and turbine inlet temperature
(cylinder number or turbine inlet side is shown below bar) (Turbo
models only, shown in Figure 3-3)
12
Left and Right Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet (Turbo
models only, shown in Figure 3-3).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
83
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 3-2 EIS Display (SR20)
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
8
7
10
11
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A84
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SR22
(Naturally Aspirated)
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
8
7
11
10
12
SR22T
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
8
7
11
10
Target
Fuel Flow
SR22TN
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
8
7
11
10
Target
Fuel Flow
12
Figure 3-3 EIS Display (SR22)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
85
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation,
electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional ANTI-ICE Softkey accesses the
second-level softkeys. Pressing the FUEL Softkey accesses the second-level softkeys.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys
MAP
ENGINE
CHKLIST
DCLTR
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
SHW CHRT
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
(Optional)
FULL TABS
ENGINE FUEL
ASSIST CO RST
ENGINE
DCLTR
ENTER
UNDO
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
BACK
ENGINE FUEL
ASSIST CO RST
ENGINE
DCLTR
ANTI-ICE
(Optional)
UNDO
FULL TABS ENTER
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its second-
level softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
LEFT
(Optional)
AUTO
(Optional)
RIGHT
(Optional)
•ENGINE Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the
Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
ANTI-ICE Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional-TKS FIKI only; See Operational Note above)
LEFT Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
AUTO Selects auto tank selection mode
RIGHT Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
DCLTR Removes bars and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
ASSIST Identifies temperature peaks
CO RST Resets the CO Guardian
FUEL Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
FULL Resets fuel totalizer to full (usable fuel)
TABS Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
UNDO Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
ENTER Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A86
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NOTE
: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM x100) Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold
Pressure Indicator
(Man “Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (SR22T models only – displays a light blue
target fuel flow indicator shown on top of the fuel flow gauge)
5
Oil Temperature and
Pressure Indicators
(Oil °F PSI)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi)
6
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential and
main bus voltage
7
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calculation)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per
gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
8
Air Data
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C, and
international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation
9
Oxygen Pressure
Indicator
Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional)
10
Anti-Ice Fluid Quantity
Indicator (TKS NH
and TKS FIKI)
TKS NH – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the single tank
(optional – See Operational Note below).
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L) and
right (R) tanks in gallons
(optional – See Operational Note below).
11
Engine Temperature
Group (Engine
Temperature)
Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all cylinders in °F (all
models) and turbine inlet temperatures (turbo models only)
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
87
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may not represent
all possible aircraft configurations.
1
12
8
3
2
6
4 5
7
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (SR20)
1
12
8
32
6
4 5
7
Figure 3-6 Engine Page (SR22) with TKS NH Anti-Ice Option
11
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A88
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
11
4
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (SR22T) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
10
9
8
6
5
7
1 3
2
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
12
4
Figure 3-8 Engine Page (SR22TN) with Oxygen
10
8
6
5
7
1 32
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
89
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles, Range), and economy (Econ) are
calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is
based upon ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for
information regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the FUEL Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10 gallon increments) to
increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
Calculated
Economy
Calculated
Time
Remaining
Calculated
Fuel Used
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Range
Figure 3-9 Fuel Calculations Group
Figure 3-10 Full Fuel (SR20)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A90
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 3-11 Fuel to TABS (SR22)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
Figure 3-12 Full Fuel (SR22)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
91
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ICE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
The Perspective™ System interfaces with either of two optional ice protection systems, TKS No-Hazard (NH)
or TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice systems. Refer to the applicable Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for a detailed system description of the installed ice protection system.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
The TKS NH system displays a single quantity gauge on the full Engine Page to indicate the amount of anti-
ice fluid available.
Figure 3-13 TKS NH System Fluid Quantity Gauge
TKS FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING (FIKI) ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the Perspective™ System) modes of operation and
a more sophisticated quantity indicator located on the full Engine Page. To accommodate the additional
modes, the TKS FIKI system employs several additional sensors. The Perspective™ System receives inputs
from these sensors and provides indications as to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
au t o ta n k Se l e c t i o n Mo d e
In the default tank selection mode (AUTO), Perspective™ assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks are
kept relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. The system uses the anti-ice fluid
tank quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and operating in AUTO mode,
the shut-off valves close under the following conditions:
•Theuidquantityisempty(indicatedfromtheuidlevelsensorandlevelswitch)
•Theleftandrighttanklevelimbalanceisgreaterthan0.25gallons(lowtankwillbecloseduntillevel
balance is within 0.15 gallons)
•Theuidquantityisunreliable(amiscomparebetweenthelevelsensorandlevelswitchoranoutof
range level sensor value)
While operating in AUTO mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of each
fluid quantity indicator, when both tanks are open. During normal operation, the white box will highlight
the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change (Figure 3-14).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A92
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 3-14 AUTO Tank Mode (Normal)
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level switch for
a particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-15) and that quantity
is not used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is out of range, the fluid
quantity indicator is marked with a red ‘X’ (Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-15 Fluid Level Unreliable Figure 3-16 Fluid Level Out Of Range
Ma n u a l ta n k Mo d e
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected by
pressing the ANTI-ICE Softkey to access the second-level softkeys LEFT, AUTO, and RIGHT. A light
blue box is displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump operating
mode.
•LEFT Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
•AUTO Softkey – returns to AUTO tank mode
•RIGHT Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range and
endurance calculations.
Figure 3-17 Manual Tank Mode (Left tank selected)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
93
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pu M P oP e r a t i n g Mo d e S
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
Operating Mode System Operation Comments
OFF System Off No modes selected
NORM Both pumps operate on a timed, repeating cycle
– 30 seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF
Provides 50% flow rate for light/moderate icing
HIGH A single pump (#1) operates continuously Provides 100% flow rate for moderate icing
MAX
(momentary)
Both pumps operate continuously for 120
seconds
Provides 200% flow rate for severe icing or to
expedite the removal of previous ice buildup
PUMP BKUP A single pump (#2) operates continuously This mode is used in the event of a timer box failure
or when BKUP mode is selected. Pump #2 provides
100% flow rate, bypassing the timer box
Refer to the POH for pilot recommended actions
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
Figure 3-18 Normal Operating Mode Figure 3-19 High Operating Mode
Figure 3-20 Max Operating Mode Figure 3-21 Pump Backup Mode
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A94
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE
: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the ASSIST Softkey to identify peaks.
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a light blue box
around the EGT readout of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between
the peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st”
is annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in a light blue box.
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak,
the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
Figure 3-22 Leaning Assist Mode
Light Blue Box
Represents Peak
Temperature
Deviation
from Peak
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
95
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
In reversionary mode, the display combines PFD symbology with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview
for information about display Reversionary Mode).
In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the normal EIS Display on the
MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The System Display shows various
system parameters and fuel calculations.
EIS Display
Figure 3-23 Reversionary Mode (SR22T)
Figure 3-24 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ENGINE BACK
ENGINE
SYSTEM ALERTS
INSET XPDR IDENT TMR/REF NRSTOBSPFD CDI
(optional)
SENSOR DME
ENGINE
ALERTS
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A96
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated anytime the initial
usable fuel is changed.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
The EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and various system parameters. Fuel
calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM) Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
4
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calc)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles
per gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer
5
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential
and main bus voltage
6
Miscellaneous (Misc) Displays engine hours and anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen
pressure (optional)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
97
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 3-25 System Display
SR22 Models with optional
Anti-Ice and Oxygen
6
SR20
1
2
3
6
4
5
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A98
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
99
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode A/C or Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram
description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the avionics system is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
•PrimaryFlightDisplay(PFD)
•MultifunctionDisplay(MFD)
•IntegratedAvionicsUnit(2)
•AudioPanel
•ModeA/CorModeSTransponder
•ControlUnit
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
The Mode S or Mode A/C transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) and also the Control Unit. The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System
Time Box. The data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figures 4-1 and 4-2).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
100
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
7
8
6
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME Tuning Window
5
134
2
1
COM Frequency Box
– Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob
– Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key
– Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
4
COM
VOL/SQ Knob
– Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window
– Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
6
ENT Key
– Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
101
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
9
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
11
10 12
7
FMS Knob
– Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
8
Transponder Data Box
– Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
9
NAV VOL/ID Knob
– Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
10
NAV Frequency Transfer Key
– Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
11
NAV Knob
– Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
12
NAV Frequency Box
– Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
102
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
GMA 347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
Figure 4-3 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
25
17 18151311 2014 1612 22 24232119
10
8642 3 5 7 91
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
1
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
2
MKR/MUTE
– Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Enables Music Mute feature.
Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
3
COM1
– When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2
– When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3
– Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1
– When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
7
NAV2
– When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME
– Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF
– Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY
– Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the
MKR/MUTE
Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT
Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
103
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
12
PILOT Volume
– Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
13
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
14
SENS
– Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
15
HI SENS
Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
16
COM1 MIC
– Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC
– Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC
– Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2
– Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR
– Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL
– Selects and deselects telephone audio.
22
COPLT
– Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT
– Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume
– Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS
Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
104
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
CONTROL UNIT
The Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder
control. Many procedures can be performed using the Control Unit rather than the MFD/PFD display bezel
controls. Annunciators above the FMS, XPDR, NAV, and COM keys are illuminated when their respective
control modes are selected.
COM and NAV radio tuning can be accomplished from the control unit. The appropriate frequency box on
the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control
unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous
radio tuning mode.
Figure 4-4 Control Unit
2
8
10
1
12
4
9
11
5
37
6
Figure 4-5 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
Tuning Selection
Box
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
105
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
1
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
2
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
3
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob – NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode:
Acts as the XPDR Softkey. FMS Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
4
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The COM tuning box is outlined with
a light blue selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4-5).
5
FMS
Key – Places Control Unit in Flight Management System (FMS) Mode. FMS Knob is used to enter
transponder codes, select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when NRST Window is present. Press the
FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The
small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
6
XPDR Key
– Places Control Unit in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be performed with
either the number keypad or FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob.
7
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is outlined with a
light blue selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
8
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
9
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
10
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/
numbers).
11
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
12
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
106
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode (press and hold SPKR Key) the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM
active frequency color changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the PFD; the two active frequencies are on
the left side and the two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting
by pressing the
COM MIC
Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected
for transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted.
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (
COM1 MIC
or
COM2 MIC
Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (SPKR Key is selected and flashing on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in light blue and white. The standby frequency in the tuning
field is white. The other standby frequency is light blue.
Figure 4-6 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Active
Fields Standby
Fields
Tuning Field
COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
107
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver
COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
Figure 4-7 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
Annunciator Flashes
During Transmission
Transmit and Receive Indicators
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the
Frequency Transfer
Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob
.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Turn the
VOL/SQ
Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off Press the
Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the
COM
Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-8 COM Frequency Tuning
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
108
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Manual frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
2) Turn the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the
Frequency Transfer
Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
Figure 4-9 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
Second, Turn the
COM/NAV
Knob
to Enter a Frequency into the
COM Standby Frequency Field
Third, Press the
Frequency
Transfer
Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
First, Press the
COM
Key to
Place the Tuning Selection Box
on the COM frequencies and
Activate COM tuning from the
FMS/XPDR COM/NAV
Knob
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the light blue frequency tuning field and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Figure 4-10 Switching COM Tuning Fields
Press the
COM
Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One COM Radio to the Other
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
Pressing and holding the COM
Frequency Transfer
Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
Figure 4-11 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
109
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
•NearestAirportsWindow(PFD)
•WPT–AirportInformationPage
•NRST–NearestAirportsPage
•NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
•NRST–NearestAirspacesPage
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the
Frequency
Transfer
Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the
NRST
Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the
FMS
Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the
ENT
Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Figure 4-12 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
Press the
NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
110
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency field from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-13, 4-14, and 4-15).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-15).
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Figure 4-13 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Turn the
FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the
ENT
Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Field
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Figure 4-14 Nearest Pages Menus
Nearest Airspaces MenuNearest Airports Menu Nearest Frequencies Menu
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
111
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
Press
ENT
Key to load
frequency into
COM Standby
Field. Cursor
then advances
to the next
frequency.
Press
INFO-1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Selected
Airport
Identifier and
Information
Runway
Information
Figure 4-15 Airport Information Page and PFD Frequency Display
COM Frequency Loads into
PFD Standby Frequency Field
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
112
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-16 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
113
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
Figure 4-17 COM Channel Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
Figure 4-18 AUX – System Setup Page
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
114
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the
VOL/SQ
Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the
VOL/SQ
Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
Figure 4-19 Overriding Automatic Squelch
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM
VOL/
SQ
Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
VOLUME
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the
VOL/SQ
Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
Figure 4-20 COM Volume Level
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
115
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the MFD; two standby fields and two active
fields. The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the
CDI
Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the
CDI
Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI
Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI
Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the
CDI
Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the
CDI
Softkey selections, the light blue NAV tuning field and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow are placed by the active NAV Frequency. The active NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
•VOR1(orLOC1)–IfNAV1isselected,agreen single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
•VOR2(orLOC2)–IfNAV2isselected,agreen double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
•GPS–IfGPSModeisselected,amagenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Tuning Field
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the
CDI
Softkey
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
116
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel.
Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-22 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the
NAV
Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the
Frequency Transfer
Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob
.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Tuning
Press the
Frequency Transfer
Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
Turn the
NAV
Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Field
Turn
VOL/ID
Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Figure 4-24 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
Press the
NAV
Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One NAV Radio to the Other
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
117
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Figure 4-25 NAV Radio ID Indication
The Morse Code Identifier
for the VORs is On Station
Identifiers
VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the
VOL/ID
Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
Figure 4-26 NAV Volume Levels
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
•WPT–AirportInformation
•WPT–VORInformation
•NRST–NearestAirports
•NRST–NearestVOR
•NRST–NearestFrequencies(FSS,WX)
•NRST–NearestAirspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the
ENT
Key (Figures 4-27, 4-28, and 4-29).
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
118
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-29).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Figure 4-27 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Turn the
FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the
ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Field
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Figure 4-28 Nearest Pages Menus
Nearest Airspaces MenuNearest Airports Menu Nearest Frequencies MenuNearest VOR Menu
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
119
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the
FREQ
Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
Figure 4-29 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
Press the
ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the
VOR
Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
120
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-30 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
121
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
•IfthecurrentCDInavigationsourceisGPS,theapproachfrequencyistransferredtotheNAV1orNAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
•IfthecurrentCDInavigationsourceisGPS,andiftheapproachfrequencyisalreadyloadedintotheNAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
•IfthecurrentCDInavigationsourceisNAV1orNAV2,theapproachfrequencyistransferredtothestandby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
122
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD. Operation of the two
marker beacon indications may not be synchronized.
Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
Outer Marker
Indication Middle Marker
Indication Inner Marker
Indication
Figure 4-32 Marker Beacon Keys and Annunciator Lights
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the
MKR/MUTE
Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the
MKR/MUTE
Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE
Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the
MKR/MUTE
Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the
MKR/MUTE
Key Annunciator is extinguished.
Pressing the SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
123
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
DME TUNING
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the Avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1
,
NAV2,
or
HOLD
state prior to shutdown.
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV
frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the
DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
DME
Modes
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
•NAV1–PairstheDMEfrequencyfromtheselectedNAV1frequency.
•NAV2–PairstheDMEfrequencyfromtheselectedNAV2frequency.
•HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the
ENT
Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
124
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4.4 GTX 32/GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
The GTX 32 Transponder provides Mode A and Mode C interrogation and reply capabilities.
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
•Level-2replydatalinkcapability(usedtoexchangeinformationbetweenaircraftandATCfacilities)
•Surveillanceidentiercapability
•Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
•Altitudereporting
•Airbornestatusdetermination
•Transpondercapabilityreporting
•ModeSEnhancedSurveillance(EHS)requirements
•Acquisitionsquitter–Acquisitionsquitter,orshortsquitter,isthetransponder24-bitidenticationaddress.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
•Extendedsquitter(optional)–TransmitstheAutomaticDependentSurveillance-Broadcast(ADS-B)position,
velocity, and heading information periodically without requiring an interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level
XPDR
Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear:
STBY
,
ON
,
ALT
,
VFR
,
CODE
,
IDENT
,
BACK
.
When the
CODE
Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear:
0
,
1,
2
,
3
,
4
,
5
,
6
,
7
,
IDENT
,
BKSP,
BACK
. The digits
8
and
9
are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the
BKSP
Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Pressing the
BKSP
Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Pressing the
BACK
Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the
BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD or the XPDR Key and numeric keypad or
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob. Code entry must be completed with either the softkeys, numeric keypad, or the
FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the
IDENT
Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
125
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
BACKBKSP
IDENT
76543210
STBY ON ALT VFR CODE IDENT BACK
XPDR
GND
IDENT
ALERTS
ALERTS
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The
STBY
,
ON,
and
ALT
Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the
XPDR
Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the
XPDR
Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
Figure 4-35 Ground Mode
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
126
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the
STBY
Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is pressed, a white
STBY
indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the
ALT
Softkey.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
127
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the
XPDR
Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the
CODE
Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-40 Entering a Code with Softkeys
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the
XPDR
and the
CODE
Softkey as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the
ENT
Key to complete code digit entry.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
128
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
Press the
ENT
Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS
Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Turn the Small
FMS
Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Entering a transponder code with the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder function on the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
2) Turn the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
5) Press the
ENT
Key to complete code digit entry.
Or:
Enter a Code with the Numeric Keypad. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the Control Unit
Second, Turn the
FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV
Knob to Enter a
Code, Small Knob Enters Code
Digits, Large Knob Moves
Cursor to the Next Code Field.
Third, Press the
ENT
Key
to Complete Code Entry
First, Press the
XPDR
Key to
Select Transponder Code
Entry from the
FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV
Knob
Or Enter a Code with
the Numeric Keypad
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
129
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the
XPDR
Softkey, then the
VFR
Softkey.
When the
VFR
Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the
VFR
Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the
IDENT
Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The
IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the
IDENT
Softkey is pressed, a green
IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the
IDENT
Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
IDNT
Indication
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
130
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, the settings are restored to those in
use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the
SPKR
Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
Figure 4-45 Speaker Key
INTERCOM
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
Figure 4-46 Intercom Controls
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
131
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
TEL KEY
Annunciator
Pilot
Hears
Copilot
Hears
Passenger
Hears
Input to
Phone
OFF OFF OFF
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music1
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music1
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music2
None
OFF OFF ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Pilot, copilot,
passengers
ON OFF OFF Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot
Copilot,
passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Copilot,
passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Copilot,
passengers
ON OFF ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
TEL audio
Copilot,
passengers, music1
Copilot,
passengers, music2 Pilot
OFF ON OFF
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, music1
Copilot, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music2
Copilot
OFF ON ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot; passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Copilot
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Pilot,
passengers
ON ON OFF
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Passengers,
music2, TEL audio Passengers
ON ON ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Passengers, music2 Pilot, copilot
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes & Telephone Distribution
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
132
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
Two volume controls, one for the pilot and a combined copilot/passenger control, set intercom audio
level.
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
Pilot side VOL/SQ knob. When the MAN SQ annunciation is lit the large squelch knobs control pilot and
copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning either knob clockwise increases the squelch threshold level.
Turning either knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch threshold level.
When the MAN SQ annunciation is not lit, squelch is automatic and the large squelch knobs have no
function.
Figure 4-47 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch
Pulling the right volume
knob controls passenger
volume, pushing in controls
Copilot volume. Copilot and
passenger share the large
squelch knob.
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch
Manual Squelch Annunciation;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Rotating the Pilot Volume Knob
controls ON and OFF function.
(Full CCW detent is OFF)
Pressing the Pilot volume knob
switches between manual and
automatic squelch.
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. Press and hold
the SPKR Key for two seconds to activate the passenger address. The SPKR Key Annunciator flashes about
once per second when the passenger address is active. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements.
Figure 4-48 SPKR Key Selected for PA Announcements
PA is Selected on
the Audio Panel
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
133
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Pressing the
MKR/MUTE
Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Figure 4-49 Play Key
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
Figure 4-50 Split COM Operation
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
134
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient
locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the
Music1 or Music2 jacks.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4-1).
CREW MUSIC
Crew music, either XM Radio or Music1, can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and
the COPLT ICS Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT
Annunciator is illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
Mu S i c Mu t i n g
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
Mu S i c Mu t i n g en a B l e /di S a B l e
Pressing and holding the
MKR/MUTE
Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
PASSENGER MUSIC
Passenger music, either XM Radio or Music2, can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the audio jack removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
135
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLS
The Pilot side volume knob controls the ON and OFF function, the pilot’s intercom volume plus manual and
automatic squelch. When pressed, manual squelch is selected and the MAN SQ LED is ON indicating that
squelch is adjusted manually. When pressed again the MAN SQ LED turns OFF and squelch is automatic.
The Copilot side volume knob controls the Copilot and passenger intercom volume level. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
Figure 4-51 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch
The MKR/MUTE key selects marker audio and silences the marker signal. It also turns On/Off Music Muting,
plus cancels the COM clearance recorder audio playback.
Figure 4-52 Marker/Mute Key
The SPKR key turns the cabin speaker ON and OFF. Pressing and holding for 2 seconds selects PA mode.
The SPKR key annunciator blinks when PA is active.
Figure 4-53 Speaker Key
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
136
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single-pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
After powering up the avionics System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel
as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Copilot/Passenger Volume
and Manual Squelch
Pilot Volume and
Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-54 Audio Panel Preflight Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
137
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the avionics components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during fail-safe operation. Fail-safe operation
may be tested by turning the Audio Panel off.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
The
COM1 MIC
or
COM2 MIC
Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
Figure 4-55 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Figure 4-56 COM Tuning Failure
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
138
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
139
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Perspective™ is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section
of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A140
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Inset Map
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
GPS Track
(dashed line)
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
Active Flight Plan Leg
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Navigation Status Box
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Navigation Page Title
Map Range
Map Orientation
Flight Plan Leg
Destination Airport Info
- Identifier
- Fuel Remaining
- Distance
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Bearing
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
141
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
•Activeightplanleg(e.g.,‘D->KICT’or‘KIXD->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
•Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol Description
Active Leg
Direct-to
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
Left Holding Pattern
Vector to Final
Right DME Arc
Left DME Arc
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
•Bearing(BRG)
•Distance(DIS)
•DesiredTrack(DTK)
•Endurance(END)
•EnrouteSafeAltitude(ESA)
•EstimatedTimeofArrival(ETA)
•EstimatedTimeEnroute(ETE)
•FuelonBoard(FOB)
•GroundSpeed(GS)
•MinimumSafeAltitude(MSA)
•TrueAirSpeed(TAS)
•TrackAngleError(TKE)
•Track(TRK)
•VerticalSpeedRequired(VSR)
•CrosstrackError(XTK)
MFD Navigation Status Box
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A142
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Map displays are used extensively in Perspective to provide situational awareness in flight. Most Perspective
maps can display the following information:
•Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
•Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
•Maprange
•Wind direction and speed
•Maporientation
•Iconsforenabledmapfeatures
•Aircrafticon(representingpresentposition)
•Navrangering
•Fuelrangering
•Flightplanlegs
•Userwaypoints
•Trackvector
•Topographyscale
•Topographydata
•Obstacledata
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
•Northup(NORTHUP)alignsthetopofthemapdisplaytonorth(defaultsetting).
•Trackup(TRKUP)alignsthetopofthemapdisplaytothecurrentgroundtrack.
•Desiredtrackup(DTKUP)alignsthetopofthemapdisplaytothedesiredcourse.
•Headingup(HDGUP)alignsthetopofthemapdisplaytothecurrentaircraftheading.
•AllMapGroupPages(MAP)
•AllWaypointGroupPages(WPT)
•AUX-TripPlanning
•AllNearestGroupPages(NRST)
•FlightPlanPages(FPL)
•Direct-toWindow
•PFDInsetMap
•ProcedureLoadingPages
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
143
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. All other displays (except the
PFD Inset Map) that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
PFD Inset Map is always Heading Up (if heading is invalid, then track up).
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
Map Setup
Selection
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
Orientation Field
Map Group Selection
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A144
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of Perspective to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
Figure 5-6 Map Range
Range Overzoom
AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows Perspective to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
•Waypointsthatarelongdistancesapartcausethemaprangetoincreasetoapointwheremanydetailson
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
•Waypointsthatareveryshortdistancesapartcausethemaprangetodecreasetoapointwheresituational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
•Flightplansthathaveacombinationoflongandshortlegscausetherangetoincreaseanddecreaseas
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
145
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
•The‘timeout’time(congurableontheMapSetupPagefortheMapGroup)determineshowlongauto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
•Whenthemaximum‘lookforward’timeissettozero,theupperlimitbecomesthemaximumrangeavailable
(2000 nm).
•Whentheminimum‘lookforward’timeissettozero,thelowerlimitbecomes1.5nm.
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A146
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
•Viewpartsofthemapoutsidethedisplayedrangewithoutadjustingthemaprange
•Highlightandselectlocationsonthemap
•Reviewinformationforaselectedairport,NAVAIDoruserwaypoint
•Designatelocationsforuseinightplanning
•Viewairspaceandairwayinformation
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
Map Pointer
Map Pointer Information
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
147
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Information about Point
of Interest
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Map Pointer on
Airspace
Information about
Airspace
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A148
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
NAVAID
Information
GO BACK Softkey
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
149
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
Airspace
Information
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A150
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
Pointer Lat/Long
Measurement
Information
Measurement Line
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
151
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar to
aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures.
Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation map.
Navigation Map
Black Background
TOPO Off
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
TOPO On
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A152
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
153
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Ground Elevation at Map
Pointer Location (only visible
when Map Pointer is displayed)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A154
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Symbol Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) Off 2000
Highways and Roads
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY) 300 800
International Highway (FREEWAY) 300 800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY) 30 80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY) 15 30
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD) N/A 8 15
Railroads (RAILROAD) 15 30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000) 800 1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000) 100 200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000) 20 50
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV) 800 1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE) 200 500
USER WAYPOINT 150 300
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
155
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
Symbol Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL) 2000 2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL) 2000 2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT) See Airports, NAVAIDs 2000 2000
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
250 500
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) 150 300
Small Airports (SMALL APT) 50 100
Taxiways (SAFETAXI) See Additional Features 3 20
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION) N/A Off 100
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT) 15 30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT) 15 30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT) 150 300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA) 200 500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA) 200 500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D) 150 300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED) 200 500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)] 200 500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ) 200 500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) 500 2000
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A156
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
LAND DATA
On/Off
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
8) Select the desired range.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
157
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A158
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Declutter Level
Navigation Map Page Menu
DCLTR Softkey
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
159
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
Flight Plan Route Lines X X X X
Flight Plan Route Waypoints X X X X
Rivers/Lakes X X X X
Topography Data X X X X
International Borders X X X X
Track Vector X X X X
Navigation Range Ring X X X X
Fuel Range Ring X X X X
Terrain Data X X X X
Traffic X X X X
Airways X X X X
NEXRAD X X X
XM Lightning Data X X X
Airports X X X
Runway Labels X X X
Restricted X X X
MOA (Military) X X X
User Waypoints X X
Latitude/Longitude Grid X X
NAVAIDs X X
Class B Airspaces/TMA X X
Class C Airspaces/TCA X X
Class D Airspaces X X
Other Airspaces/ADIZ X X
TFRs X X
Obstacles X X
Land/Country Text X
Cities X
Roads X
Railroads X
State/Province Boundaries X
River/Lake Names X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A160
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
161
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWAY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A162
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type Symbol Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY) 200 500
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY) 300 500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
TRACK VECTOR
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
163
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Wind Vector On/Off
Nav Range Ring On/Off
WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
Wind Direction Wind Speed
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A164
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
Nav Range Ring
Range (radius)
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
165
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Range to Reserve Fuel
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A166
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
167
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Range to
Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A168
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DESTINATION AIRPORT INFORMATION
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
•Thedestinationairportisthelastairportintheactiveightplanif:
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
•Thedestinationairportistheairportpriortotheprocedure(s)intheactiveightplanif:
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
•Thedestinationairportistheairportassociatedwiththeapproachif:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
- The approach is active
•ThedestinationairportistheDirect-towaypointif:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination information
fields are shown as dashes.
Figure 5-31 Destination Airport Information
Airport
Identifier Fuel Remaining
at Airport
Enroute
Distance
Estimated
Time Enroute
Bearing
to Airport
Valid Destination Airport
Invalid Destination Airport
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
169
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.3 WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on auto-
tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in Perspective. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, The system’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Identifier Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Facility
Entry Field
City Entry Field
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Waypoint Location
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A170
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-33 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
Duplicate Message
Identifier with
Duplicates
Duplicate
Waypoints
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
171
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-34 Airport Information Page
Airport/Runway
Diagram
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Softkeys
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
•Usagetype:Public,Military,Private,orHeliport
•Runwaysurfacetype:Hard,Turf,Sealed,Gravel,Dirt,Soft,Unknown,orWater
•Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
•COMAvailability:TX(transmitonly),RX(receiveonly),PT(parttime),i(additionalinformationavailable)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A172
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The AOPA directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until
INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of AOPA airport directory informantion shown (if available) on
the Airport Directory Page:
•Airport: Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
•Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
•Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
•Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers •Weather: Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
•Obstructions: General
Airport Obstructions
•Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
•Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
•Special Operations at
Airport
•Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
•Instrument Approaches:
Published Approach,
Frequency
•Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
•Frequencies: Type/Frequency •NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
•Notes: Airport Notes
•Transportation: Ground
Transportation Type Available
•Noise: Noise Abatement
Procedures
•Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
•Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
•Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
•FBO: Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
Figure 5-35 Airport Directory Page Example
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Airport Directory
Information
Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
173
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Communication Frequencies Navigation Frequencies
Approach *
Arrival *
ASOS
ATIS
AWOS
Center
Class B *
Class C *
Clearance
Control
CTA *
Departure *
Gate
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Other
Pre-Taxi
Radar
Ramp
Terminal *
TMA *
Tower
TRSA *
Unicom
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
Perspective provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A174
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-36 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Airport Identifier/
Type Length of Longest
Runway
Approach Available
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Figure 5-37 Airport Information Window on PFD
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
175
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
Figure 5-38 Nearest Airport Page
Nearest Airport
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Window Selection
Softkeys
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A176
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 5-39 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
177
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Figure 5-40 Intersection Information Page
Selected Intersection
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Identifier
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS
Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A178
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Figure 5-41 Nearest Intersections Page
Nearest
Intersection
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Information
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Intersection Lat/Long
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
179
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NDBS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
Figure 5-42 NDB Information Page
Selected NDB
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the
FMS
Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A180
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Figure 5-43 Nearest NDB Page
Nearest NDB
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
NDB Frequency
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
181
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VORS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
Figure 5-44 VOR Information Page
Selected VOR
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A182
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm
.
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
Figure 5-45 Nearest VOR Page
Nearest VOR
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Frequency
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
183
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
USER WAYPOINTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or entering a latitude/longitude. Once a waypoint
has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system
power down.
Figure 5-46 User Waypoint Information Page
Selected User
Waypoint
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Softkeys
User Wpt Comment
# User Wpts Used
Displayed if User Wpt
was created on map
page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the
FMS
Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A184
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-47 Nearest User Waypoint Page
Selected User
Waypoint
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
185
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 5-48 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A186
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the
ENT
Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a new name.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
187
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A188
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
189
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.4 AIRSPACES
Perspective can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Figure 5-49 Airspaces
MOA (Military) Class D Airspace
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Class C Airspace Alert Area
ADIZ
Warning Area
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A190
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 5-50 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
DFLTS Softkey
Airspace Alerts Box
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
191
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Figure 5-51 Nearest Airspaces Page
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Softkeys
Airspace 1
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Airspace 2
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A192
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Message Comments
INSIDE ARSPC
– Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD
– Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near and
ahead. Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near –
less than 2 nm. Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
193
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - MFD
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
Map of Selected Point
Desired Course
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Figure 5-53 Direct-to Window - PFD
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
Activation Command
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A194
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Figure 5-54 Waypoint Submenu
Waypoint Submenu
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
195
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and
allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT
pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field.
Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A196
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
197
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the direct-
to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-56 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A198
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight planning on Perspective consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. Perspective allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type Symbol
Active non-heading Leg
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment
Turn Anticipation Arc
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
199
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
•Airwayidentier,entrywaypointorexitwaypointnotfoundinthenewdatabase.
•Airwayentry/exitwaypointisnotanacceptablewaypointfortheairway–eitherthewaypointisnolongeron
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
•Loadingthenewairwaysequencewouldexceedthecapacityoftheightplan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
•ActiveFlightPlanPageontheMFD(create/modifytheactiveightplan)
•ActiveFlightPlanWindowonthePFD(create/modifytheactiveightplan)
•FlightPlanCatalogPageontheMFD(create/modifyastoredightplan)
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Page
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg Selected Waypoint Weather
- Textual METAR
- Reporting Station Location
(see the Hazard Avoidance
Section for details on METARS)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A200
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Active Flight Plan Comment
Figure 5-58 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Catalog Page
Flight Plan List
- Comment
Selected FPL Info
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
Softkeys
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which Perspective is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Creating an active flight plan with the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
201
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating an active flight plan with the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD
Control Unit and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
3) Repeat step number 2 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
Creating a stored flight plan with the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A202
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Import
Import/Export Softkeys List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
203
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Figure 5-61 Flight Plan Export
Import/Export Softkeys Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A204
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Figure 5-62 Stored Flight Plan Page
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
205
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-63 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
Flight Plan Full Message
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A206
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-64 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Use the Joystick to position the Quick Select Box and the associated Insertion Point Indicator at the location to
insert the waypoint.
3) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control
Unit and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
207
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
Perspective also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A208
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Use the Joystick to place the QuickSelect Box on the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this
waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
3) Press the MENU Key and select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Figure 5-66 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airway Exit Points
Available
Selected Exit Point
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
209
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-67 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
•StartingfromAMANO,theairwaycanbeownonlytoLIBRO.
•StartingfromSARKI,theairwaycanbeownonlytoLIBRO.
•BetweenNELDAandGZO,theairwaycanbeownineitherdirection.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A210
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Perspective allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Figure 5-68 Stored Flight Plan Page
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
Load Departure -
Load Arrival -
Load Approach -
Activate Flight Plan -
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
211
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
DEPARTURE (DP)
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A212
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-70 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Departure Transition
Points Available
Selected Runway
Selected
Departure End
Point
Preview of
Selected
Departure Selected Transition
Figure 5-71 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
213
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ARRIVAL (STAR)
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Selected Runway
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A214
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-73 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Figure 5-74 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
215
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
APPROACH (APPR)
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach Approaches Available at
KCOS
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected
Approach
BARO Minimum
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to skip setting BARO minimums; or rotate small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the
ENT Key to enter the minimum altitude using the small FMS Knob or the FMS Control Unit keyboard. Press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A216
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-76 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Load Approach?
Selected Transition
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
217
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
Perspective can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Figure 5-78 Stored Flight Plan Information
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A218
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SORT FLIGHT PLANS
The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name (comment) assigned
to each flight plan.
Sorting by comment (flight plan name):
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4 ) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
Perspective allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
219
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Perspective allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A220
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the waypoint to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the procedure to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
221
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A222
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the comment field.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
223
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Figure 5-79 Along Track Offset
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A224
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
225
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Figure 5-80 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A226
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Window
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Activation Prompt
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Active
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight segment (e.g.,
enroute)
Parallel Track
Original Track
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
227
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Figure 5-83 Parallel Track Unavailable
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
Invalid Approach
Geometry Active
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
Figure 5-84 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancel Prompt
Active Status
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A228
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
Perspective allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT K e y .
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
Current
Active Leg
Activate Leg Softkey
Selected Destination
Waypoint
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
229
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
Confirmation Window
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A230
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Active Flight Plan
Leg to Leg Distance
Active Flight Plan
Cumulative Distance
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
231
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-88 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Active Flight Plan
Narrow View
Active Flight Plan
Wide View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
Perspective allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A232
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-89 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
233
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: Perspective supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
The Perspective Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Figure 5-90 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
CNCL VNV Softkey
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A234
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
Perspective allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Figure 5-91 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey VNV PROF Softkey
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
235
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on VS TGT or FPA.
3) Enter the values using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit and press the ENT Key.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
Perspective can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Large Light Blue Text
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Large White Text
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
Small Light Blue Text
Figure 5-92 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A236
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
White Text Light Blue Text Light Blue Subdued Text
Large
Text
Altitude calculated by the system
estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit to enter the same altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
Or:
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
237
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude (MFD only).
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
•Meetingtheconstraintrequirestheaircrafttoclimb
•Meetingtheconstraintrequiresthemaximumightpathangleormaximumverticalspeedtobeexceeded
•ThealtitudeconstraintresultsinaTODbehindtheaircraftpresentposition
•Theconstraintiswithinalegtypeforwhichaltitudeconstraintsarenotsupported
•ThealtitudeconstraintisaddedtotheFAFofanapproachthatprovidesverticalguidance(i.e.,ILSorGPS
WAAS approach)
•ThealtitudeconstraintisaddedtoawaypointpasttheFAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit. To enter
altitudes as a flight level, enter F as the first character.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A238
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
239
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.8 PROCEDURES
Perspective can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
DEPARTURES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A240
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-93 Departure Selection
Departure Airport
Departure Preview
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Choices
Loaded Procedures
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-94 Departure Loading
Loaded Departure
Selected Departure
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
241
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the departure header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A242
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ARRIVALS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Figure 5-95 Arrival Selection
Destination Airport
Arrival Preview
Available Procedure Actions
Arrival Choices
Loaded Procedures
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
243
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-96 Arrival Loading
Loaded Arrival
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A244
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the arrival header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
245
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
Perspective WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is
indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type is annunciated
on the HSI as shown in the following table:
HSI Annunciation Description Example on HSI
LNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LPV
LNAV+V GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
minima
LPV GPS approach using published LPV minima
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
6) Barometric Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A246
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-97 Approach Selection
Destination Airport
Approach Preview
Available Procedure Actions
Approach Choices
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-98 Approach Loading
Loaded ApproachSelected Approach
LOAD or ACTIVATE? AnnunciationProcedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
247
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on
the map.
Or:
b) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Barometric Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A248
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the approach header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
249
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Figure 5-99 Course to Altitude
Course to Altitude Leg
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A250
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
Perspective allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Figure 5-100 Trip Planning Page
Trip Statistics
Desired Track -
Distance -
Est. Time Enroute -
Est. Time of Arrival -
Enroute Safe Altitude -
Sunrise Time (local) -
Sunset Time (local) -
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency -
Total Endurance -
Remaining Fuel -
Remaining Endurance -
Fuel Required -
Total Range -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
•Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
•Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
•Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
251
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
•DesiredTrack(DTK)-DTKisshownasnnn°andisthedesiredtrackbetweentheselectedwaypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
•Distance(DIS)-Thedistanceisshownintenthsofunitsupto99.9,andinwholeunitsupto9999.
•Estimatedtimeenroute(ETE)-ETEisshownashours:minutesuntillessthananhour,thenitisshown
as minutes:seconds.
•Estimated time of arrival (ETA) -  ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
•Enroutesafealtitude(ESA)-TheESAisshownasnnnnnFT
•Destinationsunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A252
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
•Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
•Timeoffuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
•Fuelonboarduponreachingendofselectedleg(REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
•Fuelenduranceremainingatendofselectedleg(REMENDUR)-Thisvalueiscalculatedbytakingthetime
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
•Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
•Totalrangeatenteredfuelow(TOTALRANGE)-Thisvalueiscalculatedbymultiplyingthetimeoffuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
•Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
•True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
Figure 5-101 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Leg(s)
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Selected Flight Plan
NN -
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Figure 5-102 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Selected Flight Plan
Not Available
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
253
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A254
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
Figure 5-103 RAIM Prediction
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
RAIM PREDICTION Box
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
255
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
•‘COMPUTERAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
•‘COMPUTINGAVAILABILITY’-RAIM calculation is in progress.
•‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
•‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A256
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-104 SBAS Display - Active
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
SBAS SELECTION Box
-
WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
SBAS Status
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The SBAS SELECTION ‘WAAS’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
Figure 5-105 SBAS Display - Disabled
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
SBAS SELECTION Box
-
WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
SBAS Status
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
257
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while
Perspective provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much
the same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-106 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-106 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
Figure 5-106 Assigned Heading of 240º
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A258
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-107.
Figure 5-107 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
259
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-108. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
Figure 5-108 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-109.
Figure 5-109 Entering V4 Entry Point
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A260
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-110.
Figure 5-110 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-110, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-111.
Figure 5-111 List of Available Airways for TOP
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-111.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
261
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-112.
Figure 5-112 List of Available Exits for V4
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-112.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-113.
Figure 5-113 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A262
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-114.
Figure 5-114 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-115. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
Figure 5-115 Comfirm Active Leg
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
263
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-116, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
Figure 5-116 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A264
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-117.
Figure 5-117 Turn on to Active Leg
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-118.
Figure 5-118 Turn to Intercept V244
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
265
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
9) As seen in Figure 5-119, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
Figure 5-119 V244 Now Active Leg
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A266
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-120.
Figure 5-120 HYS to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
c) Press the
Direct-to
( )
Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-121.
Figure 5-121 Direct To OPSHN
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
267
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-122.
Figure 5-122 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-123.
Figure 5-123 Enter VNV Offset Distance
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A268
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-124, the magenta arrow indicating the direct-
to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance
and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no
database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along
the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for theCDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude,
then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is used by the system to
determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Figure 5-124 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) Press the
PROC
Key to display the Procedures Window.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
269
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-125.
Figure 5-125 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-126.
Figure 5-126 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either
FMS
Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-126.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A270
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-127.
Figure 5-127 List of Available Transitions
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
271
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 5-128 Barometric Minimums Set
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-129.
Figure 5-129 Loaded Approach
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A272
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-130. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-130.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
Figure 5-130 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
273
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-131.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-131 Adjusting the Descent
c) Press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A274
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
15) As seen in Figure 5-132, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-133. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-133, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
Figure 5-132 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
Figure 5-133 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Target Altitude
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
275
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-134.
Figure 5-134 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-135.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
Figure 5-135 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A276
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-136. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
Figure 5-136 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
277
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-137. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-137 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-138). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A278
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 5-138 Approaching PYNON
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
279
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-139).
Figure 5-139 Approach is Now Active
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the
PROC
Key.
b) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-140.
c) Press the
ENT
Key to activate the approach.
Figure 5-140 Manually Activate Approach
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A280
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
Figure 5-141 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
281
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-142) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-142 Descending to the FAF
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-142.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A282
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-143.
Figure 5-143 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
283
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the
SUSP
Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-144.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the
HSI.
Figure 5-144 Missed Approach Active
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A284
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-145.
Figure 5-145 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-146.
Figure 5-146 Hold Established
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
285
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and Perspective
stops using GPS.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by Perspective in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or
heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated
position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the
aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by Perspective through DR while there is no heading and/or
airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-147. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-147. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/WAAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-147.
Also, while Perspective is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and TAWS, Terrain-SVS, and
Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and
waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A286
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Distance &
Bearing
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Figure 5-147 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
Wind Data
Wind Data
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Current
Track
Indicator
Destination
Airport
Information
Course Deviation
Indicator
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
287
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Hazard avoidance features available for Perspective™ are designed to aid situational awareness and provide
advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air
traffic.
Weather
•GDL69/69AXM® Satellite Weather (Optional)
•L-3STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
•TerrainProximity
•Terrain-SVS(StandardwithSVSOption)
•TerrainAwarenessandWarningSystem-ClassB(TAWS-B)(Optional)
•ProleViewTerrain
Traffic
•GarminGTS800TrafcAdvisorySystem(TAS)(Optional)
•AvidyneTAS610® Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
•L-3SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
6.1 XM SATELLITE WEATHER
NOTE: XM
®
Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Do not use XM
Weather information to penetrate hazardous weather.
XM® Satellite Weather is provided through the GDL 69/69A, a remote-mounted data-link satellite receiver.
Received graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive XM Satellite Radio entertainment
services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
288
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio can be used, the service must be activated. Service is
activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. XM Satellite Radio and XM Satellite
Weather services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to activate the weather
service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
•ThelabelonthebackoftheDataLinkReceiver
•TheXMInformationPageontheMFD(Figure6-1)
•TheXMSatelliteRadioActivationInstructionsincludedwiththeunit(availableatwww.garmin.com,P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
XM Satellite Radio uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the Perspective™ to display
weather data and/or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio by email (address listed on their website, www.xmradio.com) or by the customer
service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Audio Radio ID
(for XM Satellite Radio)
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Data Radio ID
(for XM Weather)
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
Select to Display XM
Information page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
289
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
USING XM SATELLITE WEATHER PRODUCTS
The primary map for viewing XM Weather data is the XM Weather Data Link Page in the Map Page Group. This
is the only Perspective™ map display capable of showing information for all available XM weather products.
Viewing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)
When an XM weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right of
the product symbol (Figure 6-2). The age of the product is based on the time difference between when the data
was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at specific intervals
(defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-1).
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-1), the
data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent
with what is currently being broadcast by XM Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the expiration time
has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate. The refresh rate
represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new
weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM Satellite
Radio and its data vendors.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
290
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Weather Product Symbol Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) 30 5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP) 60 15
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP) 30 7.5
XM Lightning
(LTNG) 30 5
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV) 30 12
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR) 60 12
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs) 90 12
City Forecast
(CITY) 60 12
Surface Analysis
(SFC) 60 12
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL) 60 12
Winds Aloft
(WIND) 60 12
County Warnings
(COUNTY) 60 5
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE) 60 12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG) 90 22
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs) 90 12
Air Report
(AIREPs) 90 12
Turbulence
(TURB) 180 12
Radar Coverage
(RADAR CVRG) no product image 30 5
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs) no product image 60 12
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs) no product image 60 12
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
291
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Table 6-2 shows which XM products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
Navigation Map Page
XM Weather Data Link
Page
Weather Information
Page
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
AUX - Video Page
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages
NEXRAD + + + + + + +
Cloud Top (CLD TOP) +
Echo Top (ECHO TOP) +
XM Lightning (LTNG) + + + + + + +
Cell Movement (CELL MOV) + + + + + +
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR) +
METARs + + + + + + + +
City Forecast (CITY) +
Surface Analysis (SFC) +
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL) +
Winds Aloft (WIND) +* +
County Warnings (COUNTY) +
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE) +
Icing Potential (ICNG) +
PIREPs + +
AIREPs + +
Turbulence (TURB) +
Radar Coverage + +
TFRs ++++++++
TAFs + +
* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
292
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3)
shows the weather product softkeys for the XM Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled. Unavailable
weather products have subdued softkey labels (softkeys are disabled from selection).
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link Weather Product Softkeys
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
COUNTYFRZ LVLBACK
NEXRAD
ENGINE MORE WX
LTNG CLD TOP
ICNG OFF
ECHO TOP
CELL MOV
SIG/AIR METAR
LEGEND
CHKLIST
SFC OFF
CYCLONE
24 HR
36 HR 12 HR BACK
LEGEND
CURRENT
48 HR
OFF
9000
12000 6000 BACK
LEGEND
3000
15000
SFC
PREV OFF NEXT
27000
30000 24000 BACK
LEGEND
21000
33000
18000
PREV OFF NEXT
42000 BACK
LEGEND
39000
36000
PREV OFF NEXT
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
WIND OFF
TURB OFF AIREPS PIREPS
9000
120006000 BACK
LEGEND
3000
15000
1000
PREV OFF NEXT
27000
3000024000 BACK
LEGEND
21000
18000
PREV OFF NEXT
30000
3300027000 BACK
LEGEND
24000
36000
21000
PREV OFF NEXT
45000 BACK
LEGEND
42000
39000
PREV OFF NEXT
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the XM Weather Data Link Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
293
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Setting up and customizing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the
MENU
Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the
ENT
Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link Page Menu
Restoring default XM Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key.
4) Press the
MENU
Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
294
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Maps besides the XM Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the XM Weather Data Link
Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active XM weather
products displayed on that page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the XM Weather Data Link Page):
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
295
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more XM weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
•EchoTops
•CloudTops
•CellMovement
•SIGMETs
•AIRMETs
•METARs
•CountyWarnings
•TFRs
•AIREPs
•PIREPs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
296
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence, icing data, or
optional Stormscope lightning is displayed.
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar
systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized
meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network
provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays
and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD
data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-
departure and enroute evaluation.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•WeatherDataLinkPage
•AirportInformationPage
•TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•FlightPlanPages
•AUX-VideoPage
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
297
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the XM Weather Data
Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
re f l e c t i v i t y
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected
back to
the radar receiver (
designated by the
letter Z)
. The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
298
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
neXrad li M i tat i o n S
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
•NEXRADbasereectivitydoesnotprovidesufcientinformationtodeterminecloudlayersorprecipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain. Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
•NEXRADbasereectivityissampledattheminimumantennaelevationangle.AnindividualNEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
•Whenzoomedintoarangeof30nm,eachsquareblockonthedisplayrepresentsanareaoffoursquare
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the
highest
level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
Block Area is 4 km
2
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
•Groundclutter
•Strobesandspuriousradardata
•Sunstrobes(whentheradarantennapointsdirectlyatthesun)
•Interferencefrombuildingsormountains,whichmaycauseshadows
•Metallicdustfrommilitaryaircraft,whichcancausealterationsinradarscans
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
299
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
neXrad li M i tat i o n S (ca n a d a )
•Radarcoverageextendsto55ºN.
•Anyprecipitationdisplayedbetween52ºNand55ºNisdisplayedasmixedbecauseitisunknown.
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
No Coverage
Above 55°N
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
300
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: Echo tops cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD or Cloud Tops are selected for display.
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
Figure 6-15 ECHO TOPS Legend
No Radar Coverage
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
301
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
302
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
XM LIGHTNING
NOTE: XM Lightning data cannot be displayed at the same time as optional Stormscope lightning is selected
for display.
Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike
icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed.
Figure 6-18 Lightning Data
Lightning
Strikes
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•WeatherDataLinkPage
•AUX-VideoPage
•TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•FlightPlanPages
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the XM Weather Data Link Page).
To display the XM Lightning legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
303
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
CELL MOVEMENT
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
Storm Cells
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the XM
Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be
displayed on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMap
•AUX-TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•WeatherDataLinkPage
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the XM Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the XM Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up XM Satellite Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
304
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical
position.
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
AIRMET
Turbulence
Convective
SIGMET
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the
SIGMET or AIRMET, press the
RANGE Knob
and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
4)
Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
305
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
Selected Airport
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24-
hour period, and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the XM Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
306
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the
ENT
Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
To display the METAR legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-27), press the
LEGEND
Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
307
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
308
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FREEZING LEVELS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
309
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the
MORE WX
Softkey.
3) Press the
WIND
Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the
NEXT
or
PREV
Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The
WIND
Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
310
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Winds Aloft data is also shown inside the Profile View (Figure 6-34) on the Navigation Map Page. Wind
direction arrows indicate headwind or tailwind components of greater than five knots along the altitude scale
using the same symbols shown in the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33).
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Vertical Profile View
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Winds Aloft Data Age
Altitude Scale
Enabling/disabling vertical profile view (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the
ENT
Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
311
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
COUNTY WARNINGS
County data (Figure 6-35) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
Figure 6-35 County Flood Warning
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Flood
Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-35), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-36 County Warnings Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
312
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
CYCLONE
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-37) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and tropical
storms using the symbol shown below (Figure 6-38). Storm tracks include date and time of arrival inside
orange boxes.
Figure 6-37 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Cyclone
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-37), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
Figure 6-38 Cyclone Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
313
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is selected for display.
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-39).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type).
The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the
MORE WX
Softkey.
3) Press the
ICNG
Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the
NEXT
or
PREV
Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The
ICNG
Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-39 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-40), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-40 Icing Potential Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
314
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is selected for display.
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass associated winds.
Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet.
Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the
MORE WX
Softkey.
3) Press the
TURB
Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the
NEXT
or
PREV
Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The
TURB
Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Data at 24,000 Feet
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-42), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
Figure 6-42 Turbulence Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
315
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PIREPS AND AIREPS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular route of flight. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to
solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility,
icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commerical airlines
and are considered lower priority to general aviation pilots.
Figure 6-43 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link Page
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
Urgent
PIREP
Selected
Routine
PIREP
AIREP
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the
MORE WX
Softkey.
3) Press the
AIREPS
or
PIREPS
Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
316
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 6-44 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
Decoded PIREP Text
Raw PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-45), press the
LEGEND
Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-45 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
317
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING
NOTE: The optional L-3 WX-500 Stormscope
®
system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm penetration.
Weather information on the Perspective
™
MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the WX-
500 User’s Guide for detailed operation information.
NOTE: XM Lightning data cannot be displayed at the same time as Stormscope lightning is selected for
display.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
•StormscopePage •AUX-TripPlanningPage
•NavigationMap •NearestPages
•AUX-VideoPage
To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages,
press the
MAP
Softkey, then press the
STRMSCP
Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Lightning Age and Symbols
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-45), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-46), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the
FMS
Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-47).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
318
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The following options are available (Figure 6-47):
•STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
•STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
•STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
Figure 6-46 Page Menu
Figure 6-47 Map Setup Menu
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
319
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-48). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
6) Turn the
small
FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the
FMS
knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 6-48 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
320
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the
MENU
Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-49).
3) Press the
ENT
Key.
Figure 6-49 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page.
However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map
. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-49).
Figure 6-50 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
321
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the
large FMS
Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the
small FMS
Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the
ENT
Key.
8) Press the
FMS
Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out
or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Stormscope Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Figure 6-51 Stormscope Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
322
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the
MODE
Softkey. The
CELL
and
STRIKE
softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the
CELL
Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the
STRIKE
Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the
BACK
Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the
VIEW
Softkey. The
360
and
ARC
softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the
BACK
Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
323
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75
°
North or 60
°
South.
Perspective™ Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated
and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice
alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude
threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
•Valid3-DGPSposition
•Validterrain/obstacledatabase
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
The Perspective™ GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and
is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry,
but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-
MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude
source.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
324
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-52 and Table 6-4 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
1000 ft
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-52 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-4 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•TerrainProximityPage
•TripPlanningPage
•FlightPlanPage
•AUX-VideoPage
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-55).
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
325
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm,
the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-53).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-54).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-55).
•TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
•OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-54 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-55 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
326
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE
Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
Figure 6-56 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
Terrain Legend
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the
VIEW
Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
327
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-57 Terrain Proximity Page (360 View)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Range Rings
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft GPS-
derived MSL Altitude
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Figure 6-58 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Terrain Legend
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
328
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6.4 TERRAIN-SVS
WARNING: Do not use TERRAIN-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. TERRAIN-SVS is intended
only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75
°
North or 60
°
South.
NOTE: TERRAIN-SVS is standard when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is installed. The TAWS-B
option will take precedence over TERRAIN-SVS.
Perspective™ Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system integrated with the optional Synthetic Vision System
(SVS). Terrain-SVS provides visual and auditory alerting to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles
relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVS, refer to the Synthetic Vision System
(SVS) section of the Perspective™ Pilot’s Guide.
TERRAIN-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse TERRAIN-SVS with Terrain Awareness and
Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the
terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft
distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerting capabilities.
TERRAIN-SVS does not provide the following:
•PrematureDescentAlerting(PDA)
•ExcessiveDescentRate(EDR)
•NegativeClimbRate(NCR)
•Descentto500FeetCallout(DFC)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
•Valid3-DGPSposition
•Validterrain/obstacledatabase
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
The Perspective™ GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and
is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry,
but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
329
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude
source.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater
than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-59 and Table 6-5 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-59 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TERRAIN-SVS
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Potential
Impact Points Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
Table 6-5 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•TERRAIN-SVSPage
•TripPlanningPage
•FlightPlanPages
•AUX-VideoPage
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
330
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-65).
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the
highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-60).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-62).
•  TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is
shown
•  OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
331
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-60 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
332
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
The Terrain-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the Terrain-SVS Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
1) Press the
VIEW
Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2)
Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
333
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-63 TERRAIN-SVS Page
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Range Rings
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-64 TERRAIN-SVS Page (ARC View)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation Window
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
334
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-6 shows Terrain-
SVS alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation
is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TERRAIN-SVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the
pop-up alert:
•PresstheCLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
•PresstheENT Key (accesses the TERRAIN-SVS Page)
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-65 TERRAIN-SVS Alert Annunciations Pop-up
Alert
Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page
(After TERRAIN-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
Alert Annunciation
Terrain Legend
Terrain Display Enabled
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
335
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
Alert
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) “Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) “Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) “Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) “Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Table 6-6 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-67. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TERRAIN-SVS Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TERRAIN-SVS Page. The alert is annunciated
when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure
6-67.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
336
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Required Terrain Clearance
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
RTC Level (FT) RTC Descending (FT)
Figure 6-67 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
Figure 6-68 TERRAIN-SVS Alerting Disabled
(TERRAIN-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TERRAIN-SVS alerting:
1) Select the TERRAIN-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TERRAIN-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TERRAIN-SVS’ or ‘Enable TERRAIN-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT
Key.
If TERRAIN-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
337
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TERRAIN-SVS conducts a test of its aural and visual annunciations. An aural alert is issued
at test completion.
Alert Type PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation Aural Message
System Test in Progress None
System Test Pass None Single Chime
Terrain System Test Fail “Terrain System Failure”
Table 6-7 TERRAIN-SVS System Test Status Annunciations
TERRAIN-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TERRAIN-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TERRAIN-SVS Page. The aural
message “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the and the
aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “Terrain System Available” is generated.
Alert Cause
PFD/
MFD Alert
Annunciation
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Annunciation Aural Message
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid. TERRAIN-SVS
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
None TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid
software configuration, audio
fault
TERRAIN FAIL “Terrain System Failure”
No GPS position NO GPS POSITION “Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when GPS
position is available
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None “Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is received
Out of database coverage
area
None “Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when aircraft
re-enters database coverage area.
Table 6-8 TERRAIN-SVS Abnormal Annunciations
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
338
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6.5 TAWS-B
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75
°
North or 60
°
South.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class A requirements for certification. TAWS-B requires the following to operate
properly:
•Avalidterrain/obstacle/airportterraindatabase
•Avalid3-DGPSpositionsolution
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS-B alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by
factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain
and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS-B can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
339
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude
differing from the baro-corrected altitude.
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-69 and Table 6-9 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-69 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Potential
Impact Points Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
Table 6-9 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•TAWS-BPage
•TripPlanningPage
•FlightPlanPage
•AUX-VideoPage
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-75).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
340
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the
highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-69).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-70).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-71).
•  TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is
shown
•  OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
341
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-71 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-70 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-72 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
342
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TAWS-B PAGE
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to
the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map
range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the TAWS-B Page.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the
VIEW
Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2)
Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
343
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-73 TAWS-B Page (360 View)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Range Rings
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Figure 6-74 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
344
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TAWS-B ALERTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-10 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
•PresstheCLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
•PresstheENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-75 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations Pop-up
Alert
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
Alert Annunciation
Terrain Legend
Terrain Display Enabled Icon
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
345
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Alert Type
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning
(EDR) “Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
*
or
“
Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up
”*
or
“
Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up
”
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution
(ITI)
*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA) “Too Low, Terrain”
Altitude Callout “500” None None “Five-Hundred”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution
(EDR) “Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution
(NCR)
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 6-10 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
346
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-76 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
11000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Caution: “SINK RATE”
Warning: “PULL UP”
Figure 6-77 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-77. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-78.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
347
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Required Terrain Clearance
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
RTC Level (FT) RTC Descending (FT)
Figure 6-78 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
Figure 6-79 TERRAIN-SVS Alerting Disabled
(TERRAIN-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-80).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft
is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the
threshold.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
348
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Height Above Destination (Feet)
Distance to Destination (NM)
PDA ALERTING AREA
Figure 6-80 PDA Alerting Threshold
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited, the alert
annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-80).
Figure 6-81 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
FIVE-HUNDRED AURAL ALERT
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” aural alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” aural alert is based on the height above terrain
as determined by the GPS altitude and terrain database.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
349
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
•Heightabovetheterrainislessthan700feet
•Distancefromthedepartureairportis5nmorless
•Headingchangefromthedepartureheadingislessthan110degrees
Figures 6-82 and 6-83 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b based on Altitude
Loss and Sink Rate respectively.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Figure 6-82 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
Figure 6-83 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
350
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Alert Type PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Aural Message
System Test in Progress TAWS TEST None
System Test Pass None None Single Chime
TAWS System Test Fail TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
Table 6-11 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-84).
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
Figure 6-84 TAWS-B Page Menu
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The aural message “TAWS
Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity is restored and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
351
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Alert Cause PFD/MFD
Annunciation TAWS-B Page Annunciation Aural Message
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid. TAWS operating
with PFD Terrain or Obstacle
databases
None TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid on all
displays, invalid software
configuration, TAWS audio
fault
TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
No GPS position NO GPS POSITION “TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when GPS
position returns.
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None “TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient
GPS signal is received.
Out of database coverage
area
None “TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft
enters database coverage area.
Table 6-12 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
352
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6.6 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
The Perspective™ offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and
altitude on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide caution or warning annunciations
or voice alerts such as Terrain-SVS or TAWS-B systems, nor does it display potential impact points along the
Profile View. It only provides color indications when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold
from the aircraft. Refer to Figure 6-52 in Table 6-4 in the Terrain Proximity discussion for a list of colors and
symbols used in the Profile View.
Accessing Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown along with a
vertical scale, next to an aircraft symbol at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally along the
bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
353
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page with Profile View Terrain and Topographic Data
Enabled
Altitude Scale
Terrain Legend
Navigation Map Range
Profile View
Corridor
Profile View Total
Distance
Terrain Enabled Icons
Distance Scale
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point Profile
View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). Terrain and obstacles in the Profile View
correspond to those shown on the Navigation Map. When range is adjusted to remove terrain or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View.
If the Navigation Map range is at or below 75 miles, a white Profile View Corridor is shown on the Navigation
Map representing the width of the Profile View based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is
unavailable). The Profile View width is automatically adjusted based on the current phase of flight (Table 6-13).
Profile View displays the highest terrain or obstacle on either side of the Profile View width from the aircraft
center.
Flight Phase Profile View Width
Approach 0.6 nm
Departure 0.6 nm
Terminal 2.0 nm
Enroute 4.0 nm
Oceanic 4.0 nm
Table 6-13 Profile View Width Scale
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
354
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6.7 GARMIN GTS 800 TRAFFIC
WARNING: The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in
visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS traffic information. It
is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Aircraft without operating transponders are invisible to TAS.
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The system enhances flight crew situational
awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual
and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking a total of 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S transponders.
The Perspective™ can display a maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential simultaneously.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the system is in Operating Mode, the TAS unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range.
The system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and aural alerting is
provided.
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
The GTS 800 surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude, and up to
12 nm in the forward direction. Range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the
directional interrogation signal patterns.
When paired with an optional 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder, the GTS 800 uses Automatic
Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) data from participating airborne aircraft transponders to enhance
the positional accuracy and display of traffic within the TAS surveillance range. Traffic data supplied only by
ADS-B Ground Based Transceivers (GBTs) is not displayed.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
355
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TAS Symbol Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-14 TAS Symbol Description
NOTE: A 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is required to display ADS-B symbology for aircraft
providing ADS-B data.
Symbol Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Table 6-15 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for all other traffic
beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
356
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates climbing or descending traffic with an
upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively .
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-86 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track.
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Figure 6-87 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
The traffic system automatically suppresses the display of on-ground aircraft equipped with Mode S
transponders.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
357
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s
groundspeed is below 120 knots or when the flaps are down. In all other conditions while the traffic system
is providing surveillance, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats.
Sensitivity
Level
Intruder Altitude
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
AYes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
A No Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
BYes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
B No Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
Table 6-16 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
358
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Aural traffic alerts do not occur when the flaps are down. Only visual traffic annunciations are issued
under this condition.
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
•Asingle“Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-17). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
•ATRAFFICAnnunciationappearsatthetoprightoftheairspeedonthePFD,ashingforvesecondsand
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-88).
•ThePFDInsetMapisautomaticallydisplayedwithTAtrafc.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-90 and 6-93), a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
Figure 6-88 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Bearing Relative Altitude Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-17 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
359
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not provided during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
test during flight.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-89). If the system test passes, the aural announcement “TAS System Test Passed”
is heard, otherwise the system announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the
unit enters Standby Mode.
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for proper test pattern display.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small
FMS
knob
to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
Operating
Mode
Test Mode
Annunciation
Figure 6-89 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
360
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
OPERATION
NOTE: The traffic unit automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after
landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The traffic unit must be in Operating Mode for traffic
to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the
STANDBY
Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small
FMS
knob
to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the
OPERATE
Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small
FMS
knob
to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
361
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-90) shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no
valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob up to 12 mn, as indicated by the map range
rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
Figure 6-90 Traffic Map Page
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level, Flight ID
Displayed
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending Traffic
Advisory Off-
Scale, 400’
Below, Level
Traffic Display
Range
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Non-Threat
ADS-B Traffic
with Track,
1000’ Above,
Level
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic Mode
field.
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
362
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
alt i t u d e di S P l a y
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the
ALT MODE
Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select one of the following (see Softkey description in previous step 2):
• ABOVE
• NORMAL
• BELOW
• UNRESTRICTED
3) Press the ENT Key.
fl i g h t id di S P l a y
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-91). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
363
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-91 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Flight ID
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, press the
FLT ID
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-92).
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-92 Traffic Map Page Menu
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
364
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
tr a f f i c Ma P Pa g e di S P l a y ra n g e
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
• 2 nm
• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
•NavigationMapPage
•TrafcMapPage
•TripPlanningPage
•VideoPage
•NearestPages
•ActiveFlightPlanPage
•SystemPages
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Table 6-18).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map:
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page must be oriented with the desired track up or heading up to display traffic
on the Navigation Map Page. Refer to Section 5.2 of Flight Management for details about changing map
page orientation.
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the
MAP
Softkey.
2) Press the
TRAFFIC
Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-93.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
365
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Proximity
Traffic
Figure 6-93 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Traffic
Advisory
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-94).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-95).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-96).
 •TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
 •TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
 •TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
 •TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
366
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 6-95 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-96 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional XM Weather data.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
367
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating OPERATING
TAS Standby STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed* FAIL
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-18 TAS Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation Description
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-19 TAS Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation Description
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
TA X.X ± XX ↕
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TRFC FAIL TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-20 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
368
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
6.8 AVIDYNE TAS610 TRAFFIC
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for a detailed discussion of the
Avidyne TAS610.
The TAS610 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
TAS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-21 TAS Symbol Description
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information is displayed on the following maps:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage(DTKuporHDGup)
•TrafcMapPage
•TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•ActiveFlightPlanPage
•AUX-VideoPage
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
369
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Figure 6-97 Traffic Map Page
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending Traffic
Advisory Off-
Scale, 400’
Below, Level
Traffic Display
Range
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
370
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page must be oriented with desired track up or heading up to display traffic on
the Navigation Map Page. Refer to Section 5.2 of Flight Management for details about changing map page
orientation.
Proximity
Traffic
Figure 6-98 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Traffic
Advisory
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
371
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the
ALT MODE
Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• BELOW
• NORMAL
• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select one of the following:
• BELOW
• NORMAL
• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
• 2 nm
• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm
• 12 and 24 nm
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
372
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-99).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-100).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-101).
 •TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
 •TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
 •TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
 •TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 6-100 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-99 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-101 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
373
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on alerts generated
by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
•A“Traffic” voice alert is generated followed by the clock position, relative altitude and range of the TA.
•ATRAFFICAnnunciationappearsatthetoprightoftheairspeedonthePFD,ashingfor5secondsand
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•ThePFDInsetMapisautomaticallydisplayedwithTAtrafc.
Figure 6-102 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
TAS VOICE ALERTS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories press the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the
MUTE
Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
374
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SYSTEM STATUS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on the operating
mode.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TAS Operating OPERATING
TAS Failed* FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-22 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation Description
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-23 TAS Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation Description
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
TA X.X ± XX ↕
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TRFC FAIL TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-24 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
375
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
6.9 L-3 SKYWATCH TRAFFIC
NOTE: Refer to the SKYWATCH
®
(SKY497) Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the SKY497 TAS.
The SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data
link.
TAS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is displayed using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-25 TAS Symbol Description
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
376
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
OPERATION
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the
OPERATE
Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small
FMS
knob
to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the SKY497 in the operating mode.
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
Testing the Traffic Advisory System:
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full traffic test pattern display.
2) Press the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey.
4) System test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols display
and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” is heard. If the system test fails, the system reverts to
Standby Mode and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Failed” is heard.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the SKY497 unit is operating:
•PFDInsetMap
•NavigationMapPage
•TrafcMapPage
•TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•ActiveFlightPlanPage
•AUX-VideoPage
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
5) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode
field.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
377
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 6-103 Traffic Map Page
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending Traffic
Advisory Off-
Scale, 400’
Below, Level
Traffic Display
Range
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
378
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page must be oriented with the desired track up or heading up to display traffic
on the Navigation Map Page. Refer to Section 5.2 of Flight Management for details about changing map
page orientation.
Proximity
Traffic
Figure 6-104 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Traffic
Advisory
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
379
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the
ALT MODE
Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• BELOW
• NORMAL
• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob
to select one of the following:
• BELOW
• NORMAL
• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
• 2 nm
• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
380
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the
ENT
Key (Figure 6-105).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-106).
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob or press the
ENT
Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-107).
 •TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
 •TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
 •TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
 •TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the
ENT
Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 6-106 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-105 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-107 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
381
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
•A“Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated.
•ATRAFFICAnnunciationappearsatthetoprightoftheairspeedonthePFD,ashingfor5secondsand
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•ThePFDInsetMapisautomaticallydisplayedwithTAtrafc
Figure 6-108 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Mode Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating OPERATING
TAS Standby STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed* FAIL
* See Table 6-27 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-26 TAS Modes
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
382
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation Description
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-27 TAS Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation Description
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
TA X.X ± XX ↕
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending)
TRFC FAIL TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-28 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
383
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
7.1 GFC 700 (OPTIONAL)
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the Perspective™
System avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system
description. GFC 700 AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
•GDU1240APrimaryFlightDisplay(PFD)
•GDU1240AMulti-FunctionDisplay(MFD)
•GIA63WIntegratedAvionicsUnits(2IAUs)
•GMC705AFCSControlUnit
•GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (optional)
•GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2)
•GTA82PitchTrimAdapter
•GSM 85 Servo Gearboxes (3)
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
•Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within either GIA 63W. Flight director commands
are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
•Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, yaw, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
•Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional) is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
•Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric pitch trim capability when
the autopilot is not engaged and provides directional trim during climbs and descents.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
384
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
GFC 700 CONTROLS
The GFC 700 AFCS Control Unit is positioned below the GCU 478, and has the following controls:
1
HDG Key Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
2
NAV Key Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
3
AP Key Engages/disengages the autopilot
4
LVL Key Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the
autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes
5
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel
Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated
Airspeed, and Altitude Hold modes
6
IAS Key Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode
7
ALT Key Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
8
VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
9
VS Key Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
10
YD Key Engages/disengages the yaw damper
11
FD Key Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
12
APR Key Selects/deselects Approach Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
810 912 11
Figure 7-1 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
385
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The following GFC 700 AFCS controls are located separately from the GFC 700 AFCS Control Unit:
AP DISC Button
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and interrupts pitch trim operation
An AP DISC Button is located on the pilot’s control stick.
This button may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
GA Button
(Go Around)
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the power lever.
MET Switch
(Manual Electric
Trim)
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim. The MET Switch may
be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural
tone.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
386
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
Control Pressed Modes Selected
Lateral Vertical
FD Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
AP Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
GA Button Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
TO
GA
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
TO
GA
ALT Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Altitude Hold ALT
VS Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Speed VS
VNV Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Path
Tracking* VPTH
NAV Key Navigation**
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
Pitch Hold (default) PIT
APR Key Approach**
GPS
VOR
LOC
Pitch Hold (default) PIT
HDG Key Heading Select HDG Pitch Hold (default) PIT
LVL Key Level Hold LVL Level Hold LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight
director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before
NAV
or
APR
Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
387
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
AFCS STATUS BOX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight
director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and
active in green.
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
Selected
Altitude
AFCS Status
Annunciation
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Command
Bars
AFCS Status Box
Yaw Damper
Status
Lateral Modes
Active
Autopilot
Status
Active Mode
Reference
Armed
Vertical Modes
Armed
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
388
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD. If the aircraft
is being flown by hand, the command bars are displayed hollow (Figure 7-4). The Command Bars do not
override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and
bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
Command Bars (Pilot Hand Flying Aircraft)
Aircraft Symbol
Command Bars
Command Bars (Autopilot Engaged)
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
389
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VERTICAL MODES
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes.
The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, or Altitude Hold modes. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of
values for each of these references using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel are also listed in the table.
Vertical Mode Description Control Annunciation Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
Pitch Hold
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
(default) PIT -15° to
+20° 0.5°
Selected Altitude Capture Captures the Selected Altitude * ALTS ± 150 ft 10 ft
Altitude Hold Holds the current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn f T
Vertical Speed
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
VS Key VS nnnn f p m -3000 to
+1500 fpm 100 fpm
Indicated Airspeed (IAS)
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
IAS Key IAS nnn k T 80 to
185 kt 1 kt
Vertical Path Tracking
(If equipped)
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
VNV
Key VPTH
VNV Target Altitude Capture Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude ** ALTV
Glidepath Captures and tracks the SBAS
glidepath on approach APR
Key
GP
Glideslope Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach GS
Takeoff
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on ground in
preparation for takeoff GA
Button
TO 7°
Go Around Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air GA 7°
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, IAS, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured instead
of VNV Target Altitude
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
390
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude. The pitch reference is set to the
aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director
pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
ch a n g i n g t h e Pi t c h re f e r e n c e
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by using the
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
Selected
Altitude
Pitch Hold
Mode Active Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
391
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
•PitchHold
•VerticalSpeed
•IndicatedAirspeed
•GoAround
•VerticalPathTracking(iftheSelectedAltitudeisto
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for example).
The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude
Capture Mode becomes active.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the reference altitude. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition.
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
ch a n g i n g t h e Se l e c t e d al t i t u d e
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
392
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the
ALT
Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
ch a n g i n g t h e al t i t u d e re f e r e n c e
When operating in Altitude Hold Mode, the reference altitude can be adjusted by using the
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel. The reference altitude can only be moved a maximum of 150 ft from the current aircraft altitude; each
click changes the reference altitude by 10 ft.
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
To Maintain Altitude Reference
Altitude Hold
Mode Active Altitude
Reference
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
393
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the
VS
Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
ch a n g i n g t h e ve r t i c a l SP e e d re f e r e n c e
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by using the
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
394
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
INDICATED AIRSPEED MODE (IAS)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS).
Indicated Airspeed
Mode is selected by pressing the
IAS
Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Indicated Airspeed Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed
and altitude.
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Indicated Airspeed Mode is
indicated by a green ‘IAS’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to
the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference.
ch a n g i n g t h e ai r S P e e d re f e r e n c e
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by using the
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
Figure 7-9 Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS)
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Indicated
Airspeed
Mode Active Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Indicate Climb
To Attain Selected Altitude
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
395
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
•TheselectednavigationsourceisGPS.
•AVNVightplan(withatleastonealtitude-constrainedwaypoint)orverticaldirect-toisactive.
•VNVisenabled(VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
•Crosstrackerrorisvalidandwithincertainlimits.
•Desired/actualtrackarevalidortrackangleerroriswithincertainlimits.
•TheVNVTargetAltitudeoftheactivewaypointisnomorethan250ftabovethecurrentaircraftaltitude.
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
ve r t i c a l Pa t h tr a c k i n g Mo d e (vPth)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
396
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
•PressingtheVNV Key
•AdjustingtheSelectedAltitude
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Altitude
VNV Target
Altitude
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
397
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
VNV Target
Altitude
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the AFCS to re-
establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
398
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
•Verticaldeviationexceeds200feetduringanoverspeedcondition.
•Verticaldeviationexperiencesadiscontinuitythatbothexceeds200feetinmagnitudeandresultsinthe
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
•Verticaldeviationbecomesinvalid(theVerticalDeviationIndicatorisremovedfromthePFD).
•AdisplayentersReversionaryMode(thisdoesnotapplytoanactiveverticaldirect-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
NON-PATH DESCENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or IAS Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-13 Indicated Airspeed Mode VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
•Atleast10secondshavepassedsincethenon-pathtransitionwasinitiated
•Verticaldeviationfromtheprolehasexceeded250feet,butisnowlessthan200feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
399
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
vnv ta r g e t al t i t u d e ca P t u r e Mo d e (altv)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
400
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
•Theactivewaypointisatorafterthenalapproachx(FAF).
•Verticaldeviationisvalid.
•TheCDIisatlessthanfull-scaledeviation
•Automaticsequencingofwaypointshasnotbeensuspended(no‘SUSP’annunciationontheHSI)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
401
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
Glidepath
Indicator
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Glidepath
Mode Active
GPS Approach
Mode Active
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
402
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
On Localizer/ Glideslope Path
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned Glideslope
Mode Active
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Indicator
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
403
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
GO AROUND (GA) AND TAKEOFF (TO) MODES
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and
keeps the wings level. The GA Switch is used to activate both modes. The mode entered by the flight director
depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground or in the air.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude.
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode arms Selected Altitude Capture
Mode automatically, and attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel) result in
reversion to Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
Figure 7-19 Go Around and Takeoff Modes
Go Around Mode Active
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Takeoff Mode Active
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
404
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around Modes.
NOTE: The GFC 700 may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees
indicated in Table 7-3 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.
Lateral Mode Description Control Annunciation Maximum Roll
Command Limit
Roll Hold
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
depending on the commanded
bank angle
(default) ROL 25°
Heading Select Captures and tracks the Selected
Heading
HDG
Key HDG 25°
Navigation, GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC) NAV
Key
GPS 25°
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track VOR 25° Capture
10° Track
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope) LOC 25° Capture
10° Track
Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
BC 25° Capture
10° Track
Approach, GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
APR Key
GPS 25°
Approach, VOR Capture/Track VAPP 25° Capture
10° Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed) LOC 25° Capture
10° Track
Takeoff
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level on ground
in preparation for takeoff GA
Button
TO Wings Level
Go Around Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air GA Wings Level
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
405
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Bank Angle Flight Director Response
< 6° Rolls wings level
6 to 25° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
>25° Limits bank to 25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
406
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
ch a n g i n g t h e Se l e c t e d he a d i n g
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Turns are commanded in the same direction as
Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g.,
a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn
reversals.
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
Selected
Heading Selected
Heading
Bug
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Heading Select
Mode Active
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
407
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode (Figure 7-24).
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
•DifferentVORtunedwhileinVORNavigationMode(VORNavigationModerevertstoarmed)
•Navigationsourcemanuallyswitched(withtheCDI Softkey)
•DuringaLOC/ILSapproach,theFAFiscrossedwhileinGPSNavigationModeaftertheautomaticnavigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
408
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
ch a n g i n g t h e Se l e c t e d co u r S e
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Command Bars Indicate Right Turn to Track
GPS Course and Climb to Intercept Selected Altitude
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Course
GPS Navigation
Mode Active Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Backcourse
Mode Active
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
409
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
410
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
•ApproachModeisactiveandaVectors-To-Finalisactivated
•ApproachModeisactiveandNavigationsourceismanuallyswitched
•During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
ch a n g i n g t h e Se l e c t e d co u r S e
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
LEVEL MODE
NOTE: Pressing the LVL Key will NOT engage the autopilot while the Stall Warning System is activated.
Likewise, the autopilot will disengage if the Stall Warning System is activated while in LVL mode.
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LV L Key engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the
autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or
heading. When the LVL Key is pressed all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight
director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll (Figure 7-26). While in level mode, all other modes are available
by pressing the corresponding button.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
411
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-26 Level Mode Annunciation
Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
Roll Pitch
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
412
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The autopilot and optional yaw damper (not available in the SR20) operate the flight control surface servos to
provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands
received from the flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any
sustained effort required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies, coordinates turns, and provides a steady force to maintain
directional trim. It can operate independently of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight
maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw commands
are provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
Pi t c h aX i S a n d tr i M
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim adapter may be used to provide manual electric trim
(MET). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch. Manual trim commands are
generated only when the MET Switch are pressed. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more
consistent response.
NOTE: When the autopilot is engaged, the MET Switch does not respond.
ro l l aX i S
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
ya w aX i S
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns and reduce or eliminate the need for the pilot to use rudder pedal
force to maintain coordinated flight during climbs and descents.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
413
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
ENGAGEMENT
When the
AP
Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged). Autopilot and yaw
damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and
‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
Figure 7-27 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
DISENGAGEMENT
NOTE: The autopilot does not disengage when the MET Switch is pressed.
Pushing the
AP
Key on the AFCS Control Panel disengages the autopilot. Manual autopilot disengagement
is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural
alert.
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
Pushing the
AP DISC
button disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director. Pushing the YD Key
disengages the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the yaw damper and autopilot are manually disengaged,
both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and flash for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect
aural alert is generated.
Figure 7-29 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert and the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation may be
cancelled by pushing the
AP DISC
Button.
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by
the autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Button.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
•System failure
•Invalid sensor data
•Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
414
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
REVERSIONARY MODE
In the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary mode. The autopilot remains engaged but
reverts to pitch hold and roll hold modes; all other modes are available for selection. If the MFD fails, the PFD
goes into reversionary mode and the autopilot continues to function.
MISCOMPARE
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the
discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If one or both of the
sensed values are unavailable, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Figure 7-31 Comparator Window
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD (SR22 only). These
annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the
ADC1, ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on
the PFD. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
Figure 7-32 Reversionary Sensor Window
If an ‘AP MISCOMP’ annunciation is displayed in the comparator window the IAU will select the operating
AHRS and the following message (e.g., ‘USING AHRS2’) appears in the reversionary sensor window. When the
‘AP MISCOMP’ annunciation disappears, the pilot must then select the AHRS being used by the IAU (in this
case AHRS2) and re-engage the autopilot. If AHRS1 is selected as the operating AHRS no annunciation will
appear in the reversionary sensor window and the pilot can re-engage the autopilot.
If a miscompare occurs between ADC1 and ADC2 the autopilot does not disengage and the IAU automatically
switches to the operating ADC.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
415
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
Figure 7-33 Flight Plan Overview
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
KMKC
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
KCOS
V 244
V 4
V 244
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
To peka
VOR
(TOP)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
416
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) Push the GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude to
follow.
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Indicated Airspeed Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
3) Use the
HDG
Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
417
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-34 Departure
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
1
2
3
4
HDG Mode
VS Mode
ALT Mode
KMKC
TO Mode
TO Mode
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
418
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the
NAV
Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
Figure 7-35 Intercepting a VOR Radial
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
HDG Mode, VOR Armed
VOR NAV Mode
V 4
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
1
2
3
Hdg
290
o
255
o
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
419
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the
CDI
Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
b) Press the
NAV
Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
Figure 7-36 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
VOR NAV Mode
GPS NAV Mode
V 244
1
2
V 4
076
o
075o
260
o
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
420
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
•IndicatedAirspeeddescent–IndicatedAirspeedModecanbeusedtodescendtotheSelectedAltitudeata
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
•Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
•Non-pathdescentinaVNVscenario–AVNVightplanisenteredandenabled,howeverPitchHold,Vertical
Speed, or Indicated Airspeed Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Indicated Airspeed Mode is used in the example.
Indicated Airspeed descent:
1) Select Indicated Airspeed Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
b) Press the
IAS
Key to activate Indicated Airspeed Mode. The annunciation ‘IAS’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel to adjust the commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce
power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
Figure 7-37 IAS Descent
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
IAS Mode
ALT Mode
1
2
3
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
421
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the
VNV
Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following:
• Press the VNV Key.
• Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude.
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
Figure 7-38 VPTH Descent
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL ALT Mode
VPTH Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
1
2
3
TOD
BOD
ALT Mode
3 nm
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
422
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Non-path descent using Indicated Airspeed Mode:
1) Using Indicated Airspeed Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the IAS Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
423
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-39 Non-path Descent
HABUK
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL ALT Mode
Planned Descent Path
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
ALT Mode
VPTH Mode
1
2
3
IAS Mode
4
VPTH Mode
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
5
TOD
Planned
TOD
BOD
BOD
OPSHN
3 nm
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
424
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
APPROACH
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the GFC 700.
When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
c)
The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the
GA Button
to execute a missed approach.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
425
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-40 ILS Approach to KCOS
HDG Mode
LOC APR/
GS Mode
PETEY
1
2
3
GPS NAV Mode
KCOS
PYNON
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
426
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance (SBAS Only):
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the
GA Button
to execute a missed approach.
4
GPS APR/
GP Mode
FALUR
1
2
3
GPS NAV Mode
KCOS
HABUK
PYNON
CEGIX
Figure 7-41 LPV Approach to KCOS
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
427
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
Press the
NAV
Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the
ALT SEL Kno
b to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the IAS Key.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
428
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 7-42 Go Around/Missed Approach
3
4
1
2
KCOS
MOGAL
GA Mode
GPS NAV Mode
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
429
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
Figure 7-43 AFCS Status Annunciation
AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition Annunciation Description
Rudder Mistrim Right
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MET switch to unstick
Yaw Damper Failure YD control failure
Roll Failure Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure Pitch axis control failure
System Failure AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Preflight Test
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Button during servo power-up and preflight system
tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos
fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the
situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Hypoxia Recognition
System is activated Activated only by the Hypoxia Recognition System
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
430
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP Modes.
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot
airspeed.
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. The autopilot, if engaged, will follow the pitch up
command for the flight director. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted to slow
the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
NOTE: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
to normal limits.
Figure 7-44 Overspeed Annunciation
Airspeed
Indicator
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
Underspeed Protection is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established airspeeds and
is available when the autopilot is on.
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (Table 7-6), a yellow MINSPD annunciation (Figure 7-45)
will appear above the airspeed indicator. When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed
(Table 7-6), a single aural “AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
TKS FIKI * Flaps MINSPD Annunciation Aural AIRSPEED Alert
OFF
0% 80 kt 85 kt
50% 76 kt 80 kt
100% 70 kt 80 kt
ON 0% 85 kt 90 kt
50% 81 kt 85 kt
* The optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System is only
available on SR22 Models
Table 7-6 MINSPD Annunciation and AIRSPEED Alert
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
431
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 7-45 MINSPD Annunciation
Airspeed
Indicator
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight
director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided
into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical
modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical modes).
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA)
If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change from
active to armed (Figure 7-46). The autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down to maintain
an airspeed no less than stall warning activation speed plus two knots, and the wings to level.
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
Figure 7-46 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation (Figure 7-47) will appear to the right of the vertical speed indicator.
Figure 7-47 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference.
The vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
432
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV)
If the aircraft decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red “UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE” annunciation (Figure 7-47) will appear to the right of the vertical speed indicator. The
vertical flight director mode will change from active to armed (Figure 7-48), and the autopilot will cause
the aircraft to pitch down until reaching a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable
autopilot airspeed.
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
Figure 7-48 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
When sufficient power/thrust is available, the autopilot will recapture the previously selected vertical
reference and the flight director mode will change from armed to active.
NOTE: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
to normal limits.
7.2 S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: This section covers only the additional ‘AP’ (autopilot engaged) status annunciation that may appear
in the Perspective
™
AFCS Status Box. This status annunciation is not analogous to both the Perspective
™
and the S-TEC Fifty Five X. Refer to the approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for
comprehensive list of annunciations and operating instructions.
In addition to the status and mode annunciations that are simultaneously displayed on both the Perspective™
(AFCS Status Box) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/or Remote Annunciator Display), the
Perspective™ displays an additional status annunciation of ‘AP’ when the autopilot is engaged.
Autopilot
Status
Figure 7-49 Autopilot Engaged (Perspective
™
AFCS Status Box)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
433
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi
®
, ChartView, or FliteCharts
®
, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
•Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
•SafeTaxi® diagrams
•ChartViewandFliteCharts® electronic charts
•AOPA’sAirport Directory
•XMRadioentertainment
•Scheduler
•Electronic Checklists
•FlightData Logging
•Hypoxia Prevention System
•Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
The optional XM Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports. XM Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer range coverage
than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
The Hypoxia Prevention System provides protection to aircraft occupants from succumbing to the debilitating
affects of hypoxia.
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside a desired flight
envelope.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A434
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION SYSTEM (SVS)
WARNING:
Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the
Perspective™
Integrated Avionics
System. SVS depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft.
The field of view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8-94). The depicted
imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second
database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVS. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVS to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS or TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
•Pathways
•FlightPathMarker
•HorizonHeadingMarks
•TrafcDisplay
•AirportSigns
•RunwayDisplay
•TerrainAlerting
•ObstacleAlerting
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
435
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS OPERATION
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the
SYN VIS
Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN
TERR, HRZN
HDG
, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
HRZN
HDG
, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN
TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN
HDG
, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN
HDG
, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
•PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
•SYN
TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
•HRZN
HDG
Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
•APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A436
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
BACK
PFD
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
SYN VIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
Activating and deactivating SVS:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
437
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
SVS FEATURES
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
SVS
Softkeys
Synthetic
Terrain
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
Airport
Runway
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Airplane
Symbol
Selected
Altitude
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
PATHWAYS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A438
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Programmed
Altitudes
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
de P a r t u r e a n d en r o u t e
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
439
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
de S c e n t a n d aP P r o a c h
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight
plan includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
TOD
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A440
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Mi S S e d aP P r o a c h
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
Descent displayed
by pathway Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
FAF
MAP
MAHP
Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
441
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS or Terrain-SVS. However, decisions regarding
terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
Wind
Vector
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the aircraft attitude with respect
to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or
when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A442
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
HORIZON HEADING
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30-degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING:
Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
Traffic
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
443
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
RUNWAYS
WARNING:
Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Other
Runway
on Airport
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A444
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TERRAIN - SVS AND TAWS ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS and TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
TERRAIN
Annunciation
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
Potential
Impact
Point
Terrain
Caution
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
445
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
Potential
Impact
Point
Obstacle
Warning
TERRAIN
Annunciation
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A446
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the
ENT
Key.
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Field of
View
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the
FMS
Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
447
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
Figure 8-13 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVS View on the PFD Field of View on the MFD
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A448
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
8.2 ENHANCED VISION SYSTEM (EVS)
The Perspective™ system provides a control and display interface to an Enhanced Vision System. EVS is designed
to provide an aid to situational awareness while operating in low visibility environments. The EVS camera view
is displayed on the AUX - VIDEO page.
IMAGE QUALITY AND INTERPRETATION
Upon power-up the EVS requires approximately 30 seconds to produce a usable image. The image generated
is monochrome (black and white). Normally the hotter an object is the whiter it appears on the display.
The EVS periodically calibrates itself to optimize the image. The calibration process can be observed on the
display as a one second image interruption, which happens every five minutes or when calibration is manually
activated.
Image quality may vary according to target size, target temperature, background temperature, and attenuation
from airborne particles or moisture within view of the sensor. If the video signal is ever completely interrupted,
the display may appear as a solid field of gray, white, or blue, and the message No Video or NO DATA AVAILABLE
may appear.
Figure 8-14 EVS Messages
EVS Calibration EVS Data Unavailable
EVS SOFTKEYS
While on the AUX - VIDEO Page, pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases EVS
display magnification between 1x and 2x.
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays EVS on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small EVS image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Pressing the SETUP Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: CNTRST -, CNTRST +, BRIGHT -,
BRIGHT +, SAT -, SAT +, RESET, and BACK.
Pressing the CNTRST - and CNTRST + Softkeys adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to
100%. Pressing the BRIGHT - and BRIGHT + Softkeys adjust display brightness in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%. Pressing the SAT - and SAT + Softkeys adjust display saturation in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
449
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the RESET Softkey returns all video adjustments options to the default settings.
While viewing the SETUP Softkeys, pressing the BACK Softkey or after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the
system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page softkeys.
The EVS softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
Figure 8-15 EVS Softkeys
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
SAT -
MAPENGINE SETUP ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT HIDE MAP
CNTRST - BRIGHT - SAT +RESET BACK
CNTRST + BRIGHT +
The video adjustment options can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting video adjustment options:
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the
ENT
Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
Figure 8-16 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A450
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 8-17 EVS and Map on the AUX - Video Page
EVS
Softkeys
EVS
Camera
View
Map
View
Figure 8-18 Full Screen EVS Image
EVS View
with Map
Hidden
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
451
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.3 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
•NavigationMapPage
•InsetMap(PFD)
•WeatherDatalinkPage
•AirportInformationPage
•IntersectionInformationPage
•NDBInformationPage
•VORInformationPage
•UserWaypointInformationPage
•TripPlanningPage
•NearestPages
•ActiveandStoredFlightPlanPages
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A452
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 8-19 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR
Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
Airport
Features
Aircraft
Position
Taxiway
Identification
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR and station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport diagram
and runway layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey
cycles back to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
453
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the
ENT
Key.
Figure 8-20 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the
FMS
Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
SAFETAXI
Option
Figure 8-21 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A454
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
Figure 8-22 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-23.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
455
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 09S3, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 02–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
Figure 8-23 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
SafeTaxi Data
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8-23 and 8-24). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8-24). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for the PFD. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A456
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date is the
beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date, the EFFECTIVE date
appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no database
card is inserted.
Figure 8-24 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Expired, SafeTaxi Not Available
Current Date is before Effective Date SafeTaxi Database has Expired SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
457
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.4 CHARTVIEW
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
•Arrivals(STAR)
•DepartureProcedures(DP)
•Approaches
•AirportDiagrams
•NOTAMs
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the
SHW CHRT
Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO
BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO
BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT
WDTH, FULL
SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
Figure 8-25 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
MINIMUMS
CHRT OPT CHRT INFO DP STAR APR WX NOTAM GO BACK
SHW CHRT
ALL HEADER PLAN PROFILE FIT WDTH FULL SCN BACK
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A458
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-26 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
Figure 8-27 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-28 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
459
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is the one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the
FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either
FMS
Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Figure 8-29 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
Scroll Through
Chart With
the
Joystick
Chart Scale
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A460
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8-33). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Figure 8-30 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
Press
CHRT
Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT -
Airport Information Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
461
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
Aircraft
Current
Position
Figure 8-31 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A462
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
In the example shown in Figure 8-31, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-32).
Figure 8-32 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-33 Departure Information Page
Chart Not
To Scale
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
463
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
Figure 8-34 Arrival Information Page
Chart Not
To Scale
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A464
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
Figure 8-36 Weather Information Page
WX
Softkey
Selected
WX Info
When
Available
NOTE
: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-36. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
465
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 8-37 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-38 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO
BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A466
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-25).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, ALL View
Complete
Chart
Shown
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
467
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-40 Approach Information Page, Header View
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
Figure 8-41 Approach Information Page, Plan View
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A468
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-42 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-43 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
469
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Press
FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-44 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A470
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the FULL
SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the
FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large
FMS
Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the
FMS
Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Figure 8-45 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Press
FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
Available
Information
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
471
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the
ENT
Key.
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Figure 8-46 Page Menus
Full Screen On/Off SelectionChart Setup Option
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A472
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the
ENT
Key.
Figure 8-47 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8-48).
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
473
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Figure 8-48 Arrival Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-49 Arrival Information Page, Night View
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A474
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
Figure 8-50 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
ChartView Database
Power-up Page Display Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garmin-
authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
475
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE
: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 0904, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 05–MAR–09 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The DISABLES date 14–MAY–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
Figure 8-51 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
ChartView
Data
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A476
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-52. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
Figure 8-52 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Expired, ChartView Disabled, ChartView Not Available
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled ChartView Database is Not Available
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
477
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.5 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available
from Garmin. Available data includes:
•Arrivals(STAR)
•DepartureProcedures(DP)
•Approaches
•AirportDiagrams
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the
SHW CHRT
Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO
BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO
BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT
WDTH, FULL
SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
Figure 8-53 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
Presssing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
ALL
GO BACK
SHW CHRT
WX
APR
STAR
DP
INFO
CHRT
CHRT OPT
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A478
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-54 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-55 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-56 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
479
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the
FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either
FMS
Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
Chart Not
To Scale
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-57 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A480
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Figure 8-58 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
Press
CHRT
Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
481
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-65) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-59) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1
or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. The
Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums,
and Take-off Minimums.
Figure 8-59 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
Info Box
Selected
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A482
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
In the example shown in Figure 8-59, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-60).
Figure 8-60 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-61 Departure Information Page
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
483
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-62 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A484
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the
FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the MFD softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large
FMS
Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the
FMS
Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Figure 8-64 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
Chart Not
To Scale
WX
Softkey
Selected
Info Available
on This Airport
WX Info
When
Available
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
Pressing the GO
BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
485
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-53).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-65 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A486
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
Press
FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
487
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Pressing the FULL
SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Press
FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
Figure 8-67 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the
ENT
Key.
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A488
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Figure 8-68 Page Menus
Full Screen On/Off SelectionChart Setup Option
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the
ENT
Key.
Figure 8-69 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8-70).
4) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
489
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
Figure 8-70 Approach Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-71 Approach Information Page, Night View
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A490
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
Figure 8-72 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
FliteCharts Database
Power-up Page Display Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
491
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the
SHW CHRT
Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE
: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 0905, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 04–JUN–09 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 01–DEC–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FliteCharts
Data
Figure 8-73 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A492
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle
is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Expired, FliteCharts Disabled, FliteCharts Not Available
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled FliteCharts Database is Disabled FliteCharts Database is Not Available
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
493
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.6 AOPA AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) Airport Directory database offers detailed information
regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in Figure 8-75.
Figure 8-75 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
AOPA DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
The AOPA Airport Directory database is revised four times per year. Check fly.garmin.com for the current
database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
Figure 8-76 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
AOPA Database
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A494
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Power-up Page Display Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-77.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 09D2, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
2 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 15–APR–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 14–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
Figure 8-77 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
Airport
Directory
Data
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the REGION field if
Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled
and will continue to function indefinitely.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
495
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.7 XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM Weather products.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and
passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment services at any altitude
throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver, not
the GDL 69.
XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
ACTIVATING XM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the
equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to XM Satellite Radio
to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
•OnthelabelonthebackoftheDataLinkReceiver
•OntheXMInformationPageontheMFD(Figure8-78)
•OntheXMSatelliteRadioActivationInstructionsincludedwiththeunit(availableatwww.garmin.com,P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A496
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
NOTE
: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (AUX Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation
data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation, but there
should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite
Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.
Activating the XM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio through the e-mail address listed on their website (www.xmradio.com) or by the
customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio
services.
2) Select the AUX Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-78 XM Information Page
RADIO
and
INFO
Softkeys
Weather
Products
Window
Data
Radio ID Audio
Radio ID
LOCK
Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
If XM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map
Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
497
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
USING XM RADIO
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS
Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the
RADIO
Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
Figure 8-79 XM Radio Page
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
Channel
List
Active
Channel
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel the XM Radio is
using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the
FMS
Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large
FMS
Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A498
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
Turn the small
FMS
Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small
FMS
Knob
and press the
ENT
Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
Figure 8-80 Categories List
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
499
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Figure 8-81 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Press
PRESETS
to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press
MORE
to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press
SET
to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level
softkeys.
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage of full volume. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL
Softkey, which brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
3) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
Figure 8-82 Volume Control
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A500
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
8.8 SCHEDULER
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
Figure 8-83 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the
ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specied date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
501
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
Figure 8-84 PFD Messages Window
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A502
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
8.9 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the SR20/SR22. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
Figure 8-85 Checklist Softkeys
CHKLIST
DCLTR
SYSTEM
MAP
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
EXIT
CHECK
SYSTEM EMERGCY
SHW CHRT
(Optional)
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page
messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is
not available.
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CHECKLIST’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
503
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
10) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
Figure 8-86 Sample Checklist
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A504
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
4) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
Figure 8-87 Emergency Checklist Page Example
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
505
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.10 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes that date (dataYYYY_MM_DD.csv). The file is
created automatically each time the Perspective™ system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the Perspective™ system is capable of logging for the SR20 and SR22.
•Date
•Time
•GPSaltitude(MSL)
•GPSaltitude(WGS84datum)
•Baro-Correctedaltitude(feet)
•BaroCorrection(in/Hg)
•Indicatedairspeed(kts)
•Verticalspeed(fpm)
•GPSverticalspeed(fpm)
•OAT(degreesC)
•Trueairspeed(knots)
•PitchAttitudeAngle(degrees)
•RollAttitudeAngle(degrees)
•LateralandVerticalGForce(g)
•GroundSpeed(kts)
•GroundTrack(degrees
magnetic)
•Latitude(degrees;geodetic;
+North)
•Longitude(degrees;geodetic;
+East)
•MagneticHeading(degrees)
•HSIsource
•Selectedcourse
•Com1/Com2frequency
•Nav1/Nav2frequency
•CDIdeection
•VDI/GP/GSdeection
•WindDirection(degrees)
•WindSpeed(knots)
•ActiveWaypointIdentier
•Distancetonextwaypoint(nm)
•Bearingtonextwaypoint
(degrees)
•Magneticvariation(degrees)
•AutopilotOn/Off
•AFCSroll/pitchmodes
•AFCSroll/pitchcommands
•GPSx
•GPShorizontalalertlimit
•GPSverticalalertlimit
•SBASGPShorizontalprotection
level
•SBASGPSverticalprotection
level
•FuelQty(right&left)(gals)
•FuelFlow(gph)
•FuelPressure(psi)
•Voltage1and/or2
•Amps1and/or2
•EngineRPM
•OilPressure(psi)
•OilTemperature(deg.F)
•TIT(deg.F)
•ManifoldPressure(in.Hg)
•CHT
•EGT
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A506
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-88. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
log_090210_104506_KIXD.csv
Local Date
YYMMDD Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
Figure 8-88 Log File Format
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
507
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.11 HYPOXIA RECOGNITION WITH AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
Hypoxia Recognition detects pilot incapacitation due to the affects of hypoxia or other physical condition. This
is accomplished by monitoring pilot interaction with the Perspective™ system. If the system determines the pilot
is not responding, Automatic Descent Mode is activated placing the aircraft in a descent to a lower altitude to
provide the pilot and passengers an opportunity to recover from the effects of hypoxia.”
The system is operative when the aircraft altitude is above 14,900 feet (pressure altitude) and the GFC 700
autopilot is engaged. Pilot interaction with the Perspective™ system is monitored by detecting key presses and
turns of the knobs
(Audio Panel and push-to-talk switch excluded)
. If a period of inactivity (time dependent on
altitude, see Figure 8-89) is detected, Hypoxia Recognition initiates and automatic descent.
Upon activation, there are three sequential phases employed by the system; determining pilot alertness, descent
to 14,000 feet MSL, and descent to 12,500 feet MSL.
DETERMINING PILOT ALERTNESS
When the system detects a sufficient period of inactivity (Figure 8-89) the Advisory Annunciation ‘ARE
YOU ALERT?’ is displayed. Selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Caution Annunciation ‘HYPOXIA
ALERT’ is displayed. Again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Warning Annunciation ‘AUTO
DESCENT’ is displayed in the Annunciation Window and ‘Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds’ is
displayed in the Alerts Window. Once again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and
reset the system. Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no interaction is detected for another 60 seconds, the system will automatically proceed with the
descent.
Figure 8-89 Hypoxia Recognition Activation Times
10
15
20
25
30
35
e
ofUsefulConciousness(min)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
15000 18000 21000 24000 27000 30000
TimeofUsefulConciousness(min)
AircraftAltitude(ft)
Aircraft Altitude (Feet)
Period of Detected Inactivity (Minutes)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A508
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
NOTE: Hypoxia Recognition does not account for terrain elevation.
As the system prepares for descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 14,000 and the AFCS enters Indicated
Airspeed (IAS) mode with the airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed setting for the specific
aircraft model. Refer to the Flight Director Vertical Modes in the AFCS section. AFCS lateral mode settings
are not affected.
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 14,000FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an
AFCS Status Annunciation indicating the system has entered Automatic Descent Mode. ‘EDM’ (Emergency
Descent Mode) is the AFCS mode that is activated when Hypoxia Recognition initiates an automatic descent.
A continuous repeating chime will be heard as long as Automatic Descent Mode is active. After the descent
begins, Automatic Descent Mode can only be canceled by disconnecting the autopilot.
As the aircraft reaches 14,000 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation.
The system again begins monitoring for pilot interaction.
If no pilot interaction is detected for four minutes, the system initiates the second descent. As the system
prepares for this descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 12,500 and the AFCS again enters IAS mode with the
airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed for the specific aircraft model.
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 12,500FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an AFCS
Status Annunciation. Also, the continuous repeating chime is heard.
As the aircraft reaches 12,500 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation
as well as the continuing presence of the repeating chime. At this point, the AFCS must be disconnected to
cancel Automatic Descent Mode.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
509
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
8.12 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP™)
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system is available only when the GFC 700 AFCS is installed.
This system is designed to provide automatic control inputs to discourage aircraft operation outside a desired
flight envelope. ESP™ works to maintain the desired roll operating envelope by automatically engaging one
or more servos when the aircraft is near a defined roll operating limit. While ESP™ utilizes the same sensors,
processors, and actuators as the GFC 700 autopilot, it is a separate function. When the GFC 700 autopilot is
engaged and/or the aircraft is at or below 200 feet AGL, the ESP™ system will not operate.
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing
the or AP DISC switch, ESP force will again be applied, provided aircraft roll attitude is within engagement limits.
ESP can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page on the MFD.
To enable or disable ESP:
1) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small
FMS Knob
to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, select the
SETUP 2
Softkey to display the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page. If the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
4) Press the
FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large
FMS
Knob to place the cursor in the STABILITY & PROTECTION field.
6) Turn the small
FMS Knob
to select ‘ENABLE’ or ‘DISABLE’.
7) Press the
FMS
Knob to remove the cursor.
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A510
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
OPERATION
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage (see
Figure 8-90). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move to
30°, as shown in Figure 8-91. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll attitude
decreases to within the desirable roll attitude range.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Figure 8-90 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Before ESP Engage After ESP Engage
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44° ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
Figure 8-91 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
511
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in Figure 8-92. The force
increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to
encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
Figure 8-92 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
0º
10º
10º
20º
20º
30º
30º
45º
45º
60º
60º
75º
75º
90º
90º
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(Figure 8-93).
Figure 8-93 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A512
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
8.13 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVS TROUBLESHOOTING
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
•Attitudedata
•Headingdata
•GPSpositiondata
•9Arc-secondTerraindata
•Obstacledata
•TAWSfunctionisnotavailable,intestmode,orfailed
•Thepositionoftheaircraftexceedstherangeoftheterraindatabase.
REVERSIONARY MODE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-94 SVS Reversionary Mode
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
513
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
Figure 8-95 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
Blue Band
Figure 8-96 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
•Ensuretheowner/operatoroftheaircraftinwhichtheDataLinkReceiverisinstalledhassubscribedtoXM
•EnsuretheXM subscription has been activated
•PerformaquickcheckofthecircuitbreakerstoensurethatpowerisappliedtotheDataLinkReceiver
•EnsurethatnothingispluggedintotheAuxAudioInjackbecausethiswouldpreventXMradiofrombeing
heard
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A514
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the AUX - System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
Figure 8-97 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Message Location Description
CHECK ANTENNA XM Radio Page - active channel field Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
UPDATING XM Radio Page - active channel field Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
NO SIGNAL XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
LOADING XM Radio Page - active channel field Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR XM Radio Page - active channel field Channel not in service
--- XM Radio Page - active channel field Missing channel information
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED Weather Datalink Page - center of page XM subscription is not activated
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
515
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE:
The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this document.
The Perspective™ Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
•Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is
based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right
of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.
•Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
•Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
•System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by a
failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the Perspective™ System Annunciations Section for more information.
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
Alerts
Window
Annunciation
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
Comparator
Window
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
516
APPENDIX A
•Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See
the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX
- System Status Page.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Figure A-2 Annunciation Tone Testing
(AUX-System Status Page)
Press to Test Annunciation Tone
•Comparator Window (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only): Critical
values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors exceed a
specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the discrepancy
is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If one or both of the sensed values
are unavailable, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Figure A-3 Comparator Window
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
517
APPENDIX A
•Reversionary Sensor Window (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only):
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1, ADC2,
AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. The
GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
Figure A-4 Reversionary Sensor Window
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The Perspective™ Alerting System uses three alert levels.
•WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention.
Warning alert text is shown in red in the
Annunciation Window and a flashing ‘WARNING’ Softkey annunciation. A repeating double chime accompanies
select warning conditions. Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert
and stops the aural chime (if present). Refer to Table A-1 for warning conditions and alerting behaviors.
•CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a
flashing ‘CAUTION’ Softkey annunciation. A double chime lasting for one second occurs with select caution
alerts. Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.
Refer to Table A-2 for
caution conditions and alerting behaviors.
•ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information.
Annunciation
alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is generated with the exception of
the 'OXYGEN LEFT ON' advisory alert, which produces a one second double chime. An annunciation
alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.
Refer to Table A-3 for annunciation alert conditions and
behaviors.
Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory
alerts only issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation. Selecting the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges
the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
Figure A-5 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
518
APPENDIX A
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Cirrus SR20 and SR22 models. Red annunciation window
text signifies warnings and yellow, cautions. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for recommended pilot
actions.
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 models.
Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Text Audio Alert
ANTI ICE CTLTank valves cannot be controlled (closed) (TKS). Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE FLOWFlow rate is low (TKS). Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTYLeft and right fluid quantities are unknown (TKS) Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY Fluid quantity is low (TKS). Repeating Double Chime
AOA OVERHEATAOA probe is overheated. Repeating Double Chime
AUTO DESCENT†Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds. Repeating Double Chime
AUTO DESCENT†Aircraft descending to 14,000FT. Repeating Double Chime
AUTO DESCENT†Aircraft descending to 12,500FT. Repeating Double Chime
BRAKE TEMP Brake termperature is high. Repeating Double Chime
CHT Cylinder head temperature is high. Repeating Double Chime
CO LVL HIGH Carbon monoxide level is too high. Repeating Double Chime
ESS BUS Check essential power bus voltage. Repeating Double Chime
1
FUEL FLOW*Check fuel flow. None
FUEL QTY Check fuel tank levels. Repeating Double Chime
M BUS 1 Check main power bus 1 voltage. Repeating Double Chime
M BUS 2 Check main power bus 2 voltage. Repeating Double Chime
MAN PRESSURE*Check manifold pressure. Repeating Double Chime
(after 30 seconds)
OIL PRESSURE Oil pressure is out of range. Repeating Double Chime
1
OIL TEMP Oil temperature is high. Repeating Double Chime
OXYGEN FAULT
Oxygen system fault. Repeating Double Chime
OXYGEN QTY
Oxygen quantity is low. Repeating Double Chime
RPM Check engine RPM. Repeating Double Chime
STALL Stall warning. Tone
START ENGAGED Starter is engaged. Repeating Double Chime
TIT*TIT temperature is high. Repeating Double Chime
UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE†None "Airspeed"
Optional / * Not applicable to all models / TKS NH (optional) / TKS FIKI (optional) / 1 In air only /
^ SR22T only / † GFC 700 required
Table A-1 Warning Alerts
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
519
APPENDIX A
Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Text Audio Alert
ALT 1 Check alternator 1 current. Double Chime
1
ALT 2 Check alternator 2 current. Double Chime
1
ALT AIR OPEN*Alternate air door is open. Double Chime
ANTI ICE HEATStall warning/AoA heater has failed. Double Chime
ANTI ICE LEVELLeft tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS). Double Chime
ANTI ICE LEVELRight tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS). Double Chime
ANTI ICE PRESSTail pressure is low (TKS). Double Chime
ANTI ICE PRESSPressure is high (TKS). Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTYFluid quantity imbalance has been detected (TKS) Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY Fluid quantity is low (TKS) Double Chime
ANTI ICE SPEEDAirspeed is too low for ice protection (TKS). Double Chime
1
ANTI ICE SPEEDAirspeed is to high for ice protection (TKS). Double Chime
1
AP MISCOMPARE
Autopilot miscompare, autopilot is not available. Double Chime
AP/PFD DIF ADC
Autopilot and PFD are using different ADCs. Double Chime
AP/PFD DIF AHRS
Autopilot and PFD are using different AHRSs. Double Chime
AVIONICS OFF Avionics master switch is off. Double Chime
BATT 1 Check battery 1 current. Double Chime
1
BRAKE TEMP Brake temperature is high. Double Chime
CHT Cylinder head temperature is high. Double Chime
FLAP OVERSPEED Flaps are extended beyond airspeed limitations. Double Chime
FUEL FILTER Fuel filter in bypass Double Chime
FUEL QTY Check fuel tank levels. Double Chime
HYPOXIA ALERT†Hypoxia caution alert. Double Chime
M BUS 1 Check main power bus 1. Double Chime
1
M BUS 2 Check main power bus 2. Double Chime
1
MAN PRESSURE*Check manifold pressure. None
NO ADC MODES
Autopilot air data modes are not available. Double Chime
NO VERT MODES
Autopilot vertical modes are not available. Double Chime
OIL PRESSURE Oil pressure is out of range. Double Chime
1
OIL TEMP Oil temperature is high. Double Chime
OXYGEN QTY
Oxygen quantity is low. Double Chime
OXYGEN RQD
Oxygen is required. Double Chime
PARK BRAKE Parking break is set. None
PITOT HEAT FAIL Pitot heat failure. Double Chime
PITOT HEAT REQD Pitot heat is required. Double Chime
1
START ENGAGED Starter is engaged. Double Chime
Optional / * Not applicable to all models / TKS NH (optional) / TKS FIKI (optional) / 1 In air only /
† GFC 700 required
Table A-2 Caution Alerts
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
520
APPENDIX A
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Text Audio Alert
ALTITUDE SEL
Climbing away from selected altitude. None
ALTITUDE SEL
Descending away from selected altitude. None
AOA FAILDynamic stall speed band is not available. None
ARE YOU ALERT?†Are you alert? None
COURSE SEL
Current track will not intercept selected course. None
HIGH MP FF* Avoid fuel flow 18 to 30 GPH and MP above 26”. None
L FUEL QTY Check left fuel tank level. None
OXYGEN LEFT ON
Oxygen system is left on after shutdown. Double Chime
OXYGEN QTY
Oxygen quantity is low. None
PUMP BACKUPAnti-ice backup pump mode has been selected (TKS). None
R FUEL QTY Check right fuel tank level. None
Optional / * Not applicable to all models / TKS FIKI (optional)/ † GFC 700 required
Table A-3 Advisory Alerts
Comparator Window Text Condition
ALT MISCOMP
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
IAS MISCOMP
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 kts.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 kts.
HDG MISCOMP
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
PIT MISCOMP
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
ROL MISCOMP
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
ALT NO COMP
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
IAS NO COMP
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
HDG NO COMP
No data from one or both heading sensors.
PIT NO COMP
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
ROL NO COMP
No data from one or both roll sensors..
Table A-4 Comparator Alerts (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only)
Reversionary Sensor Window Text Condition
USING ADC2 The PFD is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
USING AHRS2 The PFD is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
Table A-5 Reversionary Sensor Alerts (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only)
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
521
APPENDIX A
NOTE:
The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 models.
Alerts Window Message Audio Alert
ANTI ICE QTY  – Fluid quantity is low (TKS)
None
CO DET FAIL – The carbon monoxide detector is inoperative
CO DET SRVC – The carbon monoxide detector needs service
ESP CONFIG† – ESP config error. Config service req'd.
ESP FAIL† – ESP is inoperative.
ESP OFF† – ESP selected off.
ESP DEGRADE† – ESP IAS mode is inoperative.
EXIT ICING
– Exit icing conditions
FAILED PATH
– An autopilot servo data path has failed
MFD FAN FAIL – MFD cooling fan is inoperative.
PFD FAN FAIL – PFD cooling fan is inoperative.
Optional/ TKS NH (optional)/ TKS FIKI (optional)/ † GFC 700 required
Table A-6 Message Advisory Alerts
PERSPECTIVE
™
VOICE ALERTS
The following audio alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender. If the
optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the TAWS
Alerts section).
Voice Alert Alert Trigger
“Minimums, Minimums”
Issued when the aircraft transitions through the minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH)
“Vertical Track” Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent - issued only when vertical navigation is enabled
"Airspeed" Issued when the airspeed is low and the autopilot is engaged
“Altitude” Issued when the aircraft transitions beyond the set altitude limit
Table A-7 Voice Alerts
Selecting the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired voice, press the ENT Key.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
522
APPENDIX A
GTS 800 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM VOICE ALERTS
The optional GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) issues alerts using a male or female voice. The voice
alert gender is configured at installation.
Voice Alert Alert Trigger
“TAS System Test Passed" GTS system has passed a pilot-initiated system test.
“TAS System Test Failed" GTS system has failed a pilot-initiated system test.
“Traffic”
Issued each time a new traffic advisory (TA) occurs.
Table A-8 GTS 800 System Voice Alerts
Each time a new traffic advisory occurs, the GTS 800 system provides descriptive aural information to assist
the pilot in visually locating TA traffic in the following format: Bearing, Relative Altitude, Distance.
Bearing Relative Altitude Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table A-9 GTS 800 Descriptive TA Voice Alerts
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as Perspective
™
equipment begins to initialize. All
windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged,
the Perspective
™
System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure B-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
523
APPENDIX A
Database
Mismatch in
PFD and MFD
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GRS 77 AHRS
OR GMU 44
Magnetometer
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit
(A Failed GDC 74A
Displays a Red-X Over
the Percent Power
Gauge in the SR22)
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
Figure A-6 System Failure Annunciations
GTX 33 Transponder OR
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
a) Select the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
524
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation Comment
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
This annunciation is seen only
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
System Annunciation Comment
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions of the
navigation database installed in
the PFD and MFD. A cross-talk
error between the PFD and MFD
will also cause this annunciation.
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
525
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
NOTE
: This section provides information regarding Perspective
™
message advisories that may be displayed
by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message.
This section describes various Perspective™ System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due
to an LRU or LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’
annunciation as shown previously in the Perspective™ System Annunciations section.
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY & MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Message Advisory Comments
DATA LOST
– Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
XTALK ERROR
– A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
PFD1 SERVICE
– PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The Perspective™
system
should be serviced.
MFD1 SERVICE
– MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST
– PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted. The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should
be serviced.
MANIFEST
– MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG
– PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MFD1 CONFIG
– MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
SW MISMATCH
– GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
PFD1 COOLING
– PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage. The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MFD1 COOLING
– MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK
– PFD1 [key name] is
stuck. A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The Perspective™ system should be serviced if the problem persists.
MFD1 KEYSTK
– MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE
– PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
PFD1 VOLTAGE
– PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage The PFD1 voltage is low. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MFD1 VOLTAGE
– MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage The MFD voltage is low. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
526
APPENDIX A
DATABASES
Message Advisory Comments
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 navigation
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to reload
the navigation database. If problem persists, the Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 basemap
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 terrain
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing. The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 obstacle
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the Perspective™
system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure
that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
terrain database missing. The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
527
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory Comments
DB MISMATCH
– Navigation
database version mismatch. Xtalk is
off.
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct navigation database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH
– Navigation
database type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database types installed (Americas,
European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database type in both
displays.
DB MISMATCH
– Terrain database
version mismatch.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Install correct
terrain database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH
– Terrain database
type mismatch.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Install correct
terrain database type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH
– Obstacle database
version mismatch.
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Install correct
obstacle database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH
– Airport Terrain
database mismatch.
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Install correct
airport terrain database in both displays.
NAV DB UPDATED
– Active
navigation database updated.
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database.
TERRAIN DSP
– [PFD1, MFD1] Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the
specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
GMA 347 AUDIO PANEL
Message Advisory Comments
GMA1 FAIL
– GMA1 is inoperative. The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG
– GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The Perspective
™
system should be
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE
– GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The Perspective
™
system should
be serviced when possible.
GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT
Message Advisory Comments
GEA1 CONFIG
– GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
528
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT
Message Advisory Comments
GIA1 CONFIG
– GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG
– GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG
– GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The Perspective™
system should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG
– GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING
– GIA1 temperature
too low. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA2 COOLING
– GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING
– GIA1 over
temperature. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the Perspective™
system should be serviced.
GIA2 COOLING
– GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE
– GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The Perspective™
system should be serviced.
GIA2 SERVICE
– GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH
– GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted. A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
HW MISMATCH
– GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST
– GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST
– GFC software mismatch,
communication halted. Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect
COM1 TEMP
– COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power. The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the Perspective™
system should be serviced.
COM2 TEMP
– COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE
– COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The Perspective™ system should be serviced when possible.
COM2 SERVICE
– COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
529
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory Comments
COM1 PTT
– COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
COM2 PTT
– COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR
– COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR
– COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI
– GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS. GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites. Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error. Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail. Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
ABORT APR
– Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach. Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
APR DWNGRADE
– Approach
downgraded. Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘MAGNETIC’.
GPS1 SERVICE
– GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
GPS2 SERVICE
– GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE
– NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE
– NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR
– NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck. The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the Perspective™ system should be serviced.
NAV2 RMT XFR
– NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL
– G/S1 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
G/S2 FAIL
– G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE
– G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The Perspective™ system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 SERVICE
– G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
530
APPENDIX A
GDL 69/69A SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER
Message Advisory Comments
GDL69 CONFIG
– GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL
– GDL 69 has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GDL software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
GTX 32/33 TRANSPONDER
Message Advisory Comments
XPDR1 CONFIG
– XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory or the Mode S address is invalid. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
MANIFEST
– GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
XPDR1 SRVC
– XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
XPDR1 FAIL
– XPDR1 is inoperative. There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GDC 74A AIR DATA COMPUTER
Message Advisory Comments
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable. GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable. GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST
– GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted. The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
MANIFEST
– GDC2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GRS 77 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
Message Advisory Comments
AHRS1 TAS
– AHRS1 not receiving
valid airspeed.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
AHRS2 TAS
– AHRS2 not receiving
valid airspeed.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
531
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory Comments
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 using backup
GPS source.
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
Perspective™ system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 not receiving
any GPS information.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 not receiving
backup GPS information.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The Perspective™ system
should be serviced.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
AHRS1 SRVC
– AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
AHRS2 SRVC
– AHRS2 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
GEO LIMITS
– AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass. The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
GEO LIMITS
– AHRS2 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST
– GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
MANIFEST
– GRS2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
GCU 478 PFD/MFD CONTROL UNIT
Message Advisory Comments
GCU CNFG
– GCU Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU 478 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
GCU FAIL
– GCU is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GCU 478. The GCU 478 is unavailable.
MANIFEST
– GCU software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GCU 478 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
GCU KEYSTK
– GCU [key name] Key
is stuck.
A key is stuck on the GCU 478 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The Perspective™ system should be serviced if the problem persists.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
532
APPENDIX A
GMC 705 AFCS CONTROL UNIT
Message Advisory Comments
GMC CONFIG
– GMC Config error.
Config service req’d. Error in the configuration of the GMC 705.
GCU FAIL
– GCU is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GMC 705. The GMC 705 is unavailable.
MANIFEST
– GMC software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GMC 705 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
GCU KEYSTK
– GCU [key name] Key
is stuck.
A key is stuck on the GMC 705 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The Perspective™ system should be serviced if the problem persists.
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
Message Advisory Comments
HDG FAULT
– AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
HDG FAULT
– AHRS2 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted. The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
MANIFEST
– GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTS 800 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
Message Advisory Comments
GTS CONFIG
– GTS Config error.
Config service req'd.
The GTS and GDU have different copies of the GTS configuration, or the Mode S
address is invalid. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GTS software mismatch,
communication halted. The GTS has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be serviced.
MISCELLANEOUS
Message Advisory Comments
FPL WPT LOCK
– Flight plan waypoint
is locked.
Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE
– Flight plan
waypoint moved.
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD
– Timer has expired. The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
533
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory Comments
DB CHANGE
– Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE
– Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after a navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC
– Flight plan has been
truncated.
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL
– Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL
– Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx] Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
STEEP TURN
– Steep turn ahead. A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC
– Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD
– Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near and
ahead. Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near – less
than 2 nm. Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
APR INACTV
– Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
SLCT FREQ
– Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV
– Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
PTK FAIL
– Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry. Bad parallel track geometry.
PTK FAIL
– Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type. Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
PTK FAIL
– Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF. IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
UNABLE V WPT
– Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
VNV
– Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
534
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory Comments
VNV
– Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error. The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
VNV
– Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
VNV
– Unavailable. Parallel course
selected. A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
NON WGS84 WPT
– Do not use GPS
for navigation to [xxxx].
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL
– Traffic device has
failed.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
STRMSCP FAIL
– Stormscope has
failed. Stormscope has failed. The Perspective™ System should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed. A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/63W has failed.
FAILED PATH
– An autopilot servo
data path has failed. A data path connected to an autopilot servo has failed.
MAG VAR WARN
– Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#]
– <message>. Message criteria entered by the user is displayed
SVS –
SVS DISABLED: Out of available
terrain region.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
SVS –
SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
resolution too low.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arc-
second or better) is not currently installed.
CHECK CRS
– Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
CHECK CRS
– Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
[PFD1 or MFD1]
CARD 1 REM
– Card
1 was removed. Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1]
CARD 2 REM
– Card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1]
CARD 1 ERR
– Card
1 is invalid. The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
[PFD1 or MFD1]
CARD 2 ERR
– Card
2 is invalid. The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
535
APPENDIX A
GFC 700 AFCS ALERTS
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD between the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
Figure A-7 AFCS Status Annunciation
AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition Annunciation Description
Rudder Mistrim Right
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Elevator Mistrim Up
Automatic Descent
Mode
Displayed when the AFCS enters Automatic Descent Mode as a result of the
Hypoxia Recognition System detecting pilot incapacitation. When this mode is
active, a continuous repeating chime is heard.
Pitch Trim Failure If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MET switch to unstick
Yaw Damper Failure YD control failure
Roll Failure Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure Pitch axis control failure
System Failure AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Preflight Test
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail
their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
536
APPENDIX A
GFC 700 SPEED CONDITION/STALL ALERT
The following annunciations can appear on the PFD directly above the Airspeed indicator.
Figure A-8 Overspeed Annunciation
Airspeed
Indicator
Condition Annunciation Description
Overspeed Flashing annunciation indicating aircraft overspeed condition. The autopilot, if engaged, will follow the
pitch up command for the flight director. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
Underspeed/Stall Flashing annunciation indicating aircraft underspeed or imminent stall condition. An underspeed
condition initiates flight director commands for pitch down and, if engaged, the autopilot will follow
the pitch down command. Engine power should be increased and/or the pitch reference adjusted to
increase airspeed. A stall condition causes the flight director to capture the Stall Warning Reference
Airspeed (i.e., the speed at which Stall Warning Mode was entered) and commands a pitch attitude to
follow the reference speed. The Stall Warning Reference Airspeed is increased at a rate of one kt/sec. The
annunciation disappears when the condition is resolved.
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD. For more information
on Terrain-SVS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TERRAIN-SVS
Page)
Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning (RTC) “Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) “Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning (ROC)“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) “Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution (RTC) “Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) “Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution (ROC) “Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) “Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
537
APPENDIX A
TERRAIN-SVS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Annunciation
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Center Banner
Annunciation
Aural Message
System Test in Progress TERRAIN TEST None
System Test Pass None None Single Chime
Terrain Alerting is disabled None
None
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid. Terrain-SVS operating
with PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases
None TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
Terrain System Test Fail TERRAIN FAIL “Terrain System Failure”
Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or
invalid, invalid software configuration, system
audio fault
TERRAIN FAIL “Terrain System Failure”
No GPS position NO GPS POSITION “Terrain System Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS signal, Out of
database coverage area None “Terrain System Not Available”
Sufficient GPS signal reception restored None None “Terrain System Available”
TAWS-B ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD when the TAWS-B page
is not in view. For more information on TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B
Page)
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR) “Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC) or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI) or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC) or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
538
APPENDIX A
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B
Page)
Aural Message
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC) or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI) or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA) “Too Low, Terrain”
Altitude Callout “500” None None “Five-Hundred”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR) “Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
TAWS-B SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Alert Type PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
TAWS-B Page Center
Banner Annunciation Aural Message
System Test in Progress TAWS TEST None
System Test Pass None None Single Chime
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases None TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
TAWS-B System Test Fail TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or invalid,
invalid software configuration, system audio fault TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
No GPS position NO GPS POSITION “TAWS Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS signal, Out of database
coverage area None “TAWS Not Available”
Sufficient GPS signal reception restored None None “TAWS Available”
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
539
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results Description
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’ A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’ The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’ Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’ Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’ The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’ The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’ The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’ One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’ The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight export failed.’ The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
540
APPENDIX A
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
541
APPENDIX B
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD
cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and Jeppesen ChartView database updates.
Not all SD cards are compatible with the Perspective™. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or Cirrus.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
•Expandedbasemap
•Terrain
•Airportterrain
•Obstacle
•SafeTaxi
•FliteCharts
•AirportDirectory
(AOPA)
After subscribing to the desired database product updates, a personal computer is used to copy these updated
databases to the Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom card slot of the MFD (this is also the
card that contains the FliteCharts or ChartView database). This allows taking all applicable databases to the
airplane on one card and using the Perspective™ system to update the remaining display Supplemental Data
Cards. Figure B-1 illustrates the correct location of the Supplemental Data Cards and their respective databases.
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, these Supplemental Data Cards must remain in
the bottom card slot of each display.
Figure B-1 Correct Database Locations
MFD
PFD
Bottom Card Slot Bottom Card Slot
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
542
APPENDIX B
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year and has no expiration date
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
OBTAINING GARMIN DATABASE UPDATES
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and copy the new
databases onto the appropriate Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
•Windows-compatiblePCcomputer(Windows2000orXPrecommended)
•SDCardReader:SanDiskSDDR-93,SanDiskSDDR-99,Verbatim#96504,orequivalent
•UpdateddatabaseobtainedfromtheGarminwebsite
•ExistingSupplementalDatabaseSDCard(010-00330-41,-42,or-43)fromtheMFD.Thesupplemental
data card from the MFD should be used because all databases (except the active navigation database) are
required to reside on this card.
JEPPESEN DATABASES
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
NOTE: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
543
APPENDIX B
The ChartView database should be copied to the Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom
card slot on the MFD. The navigation database is be loaded from the Jeppesen or user supplied SD data card.
Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NAVIGATION DATABASE
The system allows each display to store a future update to the navigation database as the standby navigation
database. The standby navigation database resides on the bottom SD card so it can be automatically loaded
to internal memory as the active database when the new database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes
available seven days prior to its effective date). Automatic loading of the active navigation database can only
occur while the aircraft is on the ground.
If an SD card containing a navigation database is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and a
Supplemental Data Card is in the bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon power up) as to how the
database should be stored. If the user responds affirmatively (YES) to the first prompt, the system will copy
the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card as the standby navigation database. As
long as the bottom SD card remains in the bottom card slot, this standby navigation database will be available
for the system to use as the active database as soon as the effective date is reached, and power is cycled
while the aircraft is on the ground. If the user responds negatively (NO), the system will display a second
prompt to load the database into the internal memory of that display as the active database. Loading the new
navigation database as the active database necessitates placing the SD card in the top card slot of each display
and repeating the load process.
The system checks the active and standby navigation databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the
effective date of the standby database has passed, and the active database is out of date, the system will load
the standby database into the internal system memory as the active navigation database. Loading the standby
database to the active location takes approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is
complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the databases from a single SD card
residing in the bottom card slot of the MFD to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD to ensure that all
databases are synchronized. During power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If
similar databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card that does
not already contain that database.
NOTE: Garmin recommends enabling the automatic database synchronization feature to protect against
database mismatches.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Standby Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport
Terrain, Obstacle, Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored
on the SD card that resides in the bottom card slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active
navigation database which is stored in internal memory in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts
and ChartView) which are only required to reside on the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD. The
typical procedure would be to copy new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
Perform this procedure only when the aircraft is on the ground.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
544
APPENDIX B
NOTE: The terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method. Therefore
the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power source while
performing the database synchronization.
The SYNC DBS Softkey (Figure B-2) on the AUX–System Status Page allows control of the automatic database
synchronization feature. When database synchronization is enabled, the SYNC DBS Softkey is displayed as
black text on gray background. When database synchronization is disabled, the softkey is displayed as white
text on black background. If the SYNC DBS Softkey is pressed while a database synchronization is in progress,
the current synchronization process will be canceled.
Figure B-2 SYNC DBS Softkey
Disabled
Enabled
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section of
the Database Window (Figure B-3). This window shows the synchronization status of each applicable database,
including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being copied. The
Sync Status section is only present when synchronization is occurring or has occurred on the current power-up.
When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to which the
databases were copied. The database cycle numbers should be checked for each database on each display after
synchronization to verify the display contains the proper database version.
Sync Status Section
Figure B-3 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
545
APPENDIX B
The Display Database Selection Softkey (Figure B-4) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window.
Upon first press of the Display Database Selection Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black
text on gray background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll
through all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Selection
Softkey is pressed repeatedly, the softkey will switch between PFD1 and MFD1. Database status information in
the Database Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD.
Figure B-4 Display Database Selection Softkey
Unselected MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
If an error occurs during synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected display
in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-5). If synchronization completes on one display,
but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplays listed after it.
When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before synchronization can be
completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or ‘Err’ is shown.
Figure B-5 Synchronization Error Message
‘Card Full’ Message
Error Message Description
Canceled An active synchronization has been canceled using the SYNC DBS Softkey
Card Full SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Err Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
Timeout System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
546
APPENDIX B
Loading the Garmin database updates:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-6). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this
message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
Figure B-6 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Make sure the SYNC DBS Softkey is in the enabled state (Figure B-2).
9) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-5.
10) Remove and reapply power to the system.
11) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
12) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
13) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
Canceling an automatic database synchronization:
1) While synchronization is in progress, press the SYNC DBS Softkey to disable (Figure B-2) automatic database
synchronization.
2) Acknowledge the cancelation by pressing the ENT Key.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
547
APPENDIX B
Loading the Jeppesen navigation database as the active navigation database:
NOTE: Loading the Jeppesen navigation database as the active database prior to its effective date will result
in the expiration date on the power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being
displayed in yellow.
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
Figure B-7 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed. Press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.
Figure B-8 Active Navigation Database Prompt
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD or MFD).
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
548
APPENDIX B
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display. Figure B-9 shows the active navigation database information for the MFD.
NOTE: After the navigation database is loaded or copied, the top SD card may be removed.
Figure B-9 Check Database Cycle Number
Loading the Jeppesen navigation database as the standby navigation database:
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to Figure B-10 is displayed.
Figure B-10 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
549
APPENDIX B
4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD. A
prompt similar to Figure B-11 is displayed.
Figure B-11 Active Navigation Database Prompt
5) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database.
6) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
NOTE: During the synchronization process, version differences between standby navigation databases will
exist. This will result in the system displaying a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.
This alert will remain until the next power cycle.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
9) If necessary, press the SYNC DBS Softkey to enable database synchronization (Figure B-2). A confirmation box
is displayed as shown in Figure B-12. If Database Synchronization has been enabled prior to this step, proceed
to step 11.
Figure B-12 Enable Database Synchronization Prompt
10) With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
11) The new database is copied to the SD card in bottom card slot of the PFD. Progress can be monitored in the
SYNC STATUS field as shown in Figure B-13. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed as seen in Figure
B-14.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
550
APPENDIX B
Figure B-13 Copy Progress
Figure B-14 Copy Complete
12) Turn system power OFF.
13) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
14) Turn system power ON.
15) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
16) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
17) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
551
APPENDIX B
18) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display. Figure B-15 shows the navigation database information for the MFD.
NOTE: After the navigation database is loaded or copied, the top SD card may be removed.
Figure B-15 MFD Navigation Database Information
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
552
APPENDIX B
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
553
APPENDIX C
AACC accuracy
ACT, ACTV active, activate
ADC air data computer
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADI Attitude Direction Indicator
ADM Automatic Descent Mode
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance -
Broadcast
AF Arc to fix
AFCS Automatic Flight Control System
AFM Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM airframe
AGL Above Ground Level
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference
System
AIM Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRMET Airman’s Meteorological Information
ALRT alert
ALT altitude
ALT, ALTN alternator
AMPS amperes
ANNUNC annunciation
ANT antenna
AOPA Aircraft Owners & Pilots Association
AP autopilot
AP DISC autopilot disconnect
APR approach
APT airport, aerodrome
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARSPC airspace
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center
ARV arrival
AS airspeed
ASB Aviation Support Branch
ASOS Automated Surface Observing
System
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS ATC Radar Beacon System
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information
Service
ATK along-track
AUTOSEQ automatic sequence
AUX auxiliary
AWOS Automated Weather Observing
System
B ALT barometric altitude
BARO barometric setting
BATT battery
BC backcourse
Bearing The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
BFO beat frequency oscillator
BKSP backspace
BRG bearing
C center runway
ºC degrees Celsius
CA Course to Altitude
CALC calculator
Calibrated Airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
CD Course to DME distance
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDU Control Display Unit
CF Course to Fix
CHT Cylinder Head Temperature
CHKLIST checklist
CHNL channel
CI Course to Intercept
CLD cloud
CLR clear
cm centimeter
CNS Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
CO carbon monoxide
COM communication radio
CONFIG configuration
COOL coolant
COPLT co-pilot
Course The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
Course to Steer The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan.
CR Course to Radial
CRG Cockpit Reference Guide
CRNT current
Crosstrack Error The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right.
CRS course
CRS Course to Steer
GLOSSARY
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
554
APPENDIX C
CRSR cursor
CTA Control Area
CTRL control
Cumulative The total of all legs in a flight plan.
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder
CVRG coverage
CWS control wheel steering
CYL cylinder
D ALT density altitude
DB, DBASE database
dBZ decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
DCLTR, DECLTR declutter
DEC FUEL decrease fuel
deg degree
DEIC, DEICE de-icing
DEP departure
Desired Track The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints.
DEST destination
DF Direct to Fix
DFLT default
DGRD degrade
DH decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry).
DIR direction
DIS distance
Distance The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP Dilution of Precision
DP Departure Procedure
DPRT departure
DR dead reckoning
DSBL disabled
DTK Desired Track
E empty, east
ECU Engine Control Unit
Efficiency A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of
fuel.
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
EIS Engine Indication System
ELEV elevation
ELEV elevator
EMERGCY emergency
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ENDUR endurance
Endurance Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board.
ENG engine
ENGD engaged
ENR enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT enter
EPE Estimated Position Error
EPU Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR error
ES Extended Squitter
ESP Electronic Stability and Protection
ESA Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS
position error derived by satellite
geometry conditions and other
factors.
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to
reach the destination waypoint from
the present position, based upon
current ground speed.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE Estimated Time Enroute
EVS Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD expired
ºF degrees Fahrenheit
FA Course From Fix to Altitude
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FAF Final Approach Fix
FAIL failure
FC Course From Fix to Distance
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FCST forecast
FD Course From Fix to DME Distance
FD flight director
FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion
FFLOW fuel flow
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
555
APPENDIX C
FIS-B Flight Information Services-
Broadcast
FISDL Flight Information Service Data Link
FL flight level
FLC Flight Level Change
FM Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
FMS Flight Management System
FOB Fuel On Board
FPL flight plan
fpm feet per minute
FREQ frequency
FRZ freezing
FSS Flight Service Station
ft foot/feet
Fuel Flow The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft.
G/S, GS glideslope
GA go-around
gal, gl gallon(s)
GBOX gearbox
GDC Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL Garmin Satellite Data Link
GDU Garmin Display Unit
GEA Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
GEO geographic
GFC Garmin Flight Control
GIA Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
GLS Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
GMA Garmin Audio Panel System
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND ground
gph gallons per hour
GPS Global Positioning System
Grid MORA Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
Groundspeed The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground
position.
Ground Track
see Track
GRS Garmin Reference System
GS Ground speed
GTS Garmin Traffic System
GTX Garmin Transponder
HA Hold Terminating at Altitude
HDG heading
Heading The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro.
HF Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg mercury
HI high
HI SENS High Sensitivity
HM Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s horizontal position.
hPa hectopascal
HPL Horizontal Protection Level
hr hour
HSDB High-Speed Data Bus
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT heat
HUL Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz Hertz
I Inner Marker
IAF Initial Approach Fix
IAT Indicated Air Temperature
ICAO International Civil Aviation
Organization
ICS Intercom System
ID Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT identification
IF Initial Fix
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IG Imperial gallon
ILS Instrument Landing System
IMC Instrument Meteorological
Conditions
in inch
INACTV inactive
INC FUEL increase fuel
IND indicated
Indicated Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel.
INFO information
in HG inches of mercury
INT intersection(s)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
556
APPENDIX C
INTEG integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK key stuck
kg kilogram
kHz kilohertz
km kilometer
kt knot
L left, left runway
LAT latitude
LBL label
lb pound
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCL local
LED Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining
on board after the completion of
one or more legs of a flight plan or
direct-to.
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or direct-
to, and a known consumption rate.
Leg The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints.
LIFR Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV Lateral Navigation
LO low
LOC localizer
LOI loss of integrity (GPS)
LON longitude
LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU Line Replacement Unit
LT left
LTNG lightning
LVL level
M Middle Marker
m meter
MAG Magnetic
MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
MAHP Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN manifold pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ Manual Squelch
MAP Missed Approach Point
MASQ Master Avionics Squelch
MAX maximum
MAXSPD maximum speed (overspeed)
MDA barometric minimum descent
altitude
MET manual electric trim
METAR Meteorological Aviation Routine
MEPT manual electric pitch trim
MFD Multi Function Display
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MHz megahertz
MIC microphone
MIN minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine
a safe altitude within ten miles of
the aircraft present position.
MKR marker beacon
MOA Military Operations Area
MOV movement
mpm meters per minute
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS Multi-functional Satellite
Augmentation System
MSG message
MSL Mean Sea Level
MT meter
mV millivolt(s)
MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N north
NAV navigation
NAVAID NAVigation AID
NDB Non-directional Beacon
NEXRAD Next Generation Radar
nm nautical mile(s)
NPT
NRST nearest
O Outer Marker
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni Bearing Selector
OFST offset
OXY oxygen
P ALT pressure altitude
PA Passenger Address
PA Proximity Advisory
PASS passenger(s)
PC personal computer
PFD Primary Flight Display
PI Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
PIT, PTCH pitch
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
557
APPENDIX C
POSN position
PPM parts per million
P. POS Present Position
PRES, PRESS pressure
PROC procedure(s), procedure turn
psi pounds per square inch
PT Procedure Turn
PTK parallel track
PTT Push-to-Talk
PWR power
QTY quantity
R right, right runway
RAD radial
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
RAM random access memory
REF reference
REM remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
REQ required
RES reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
REV reverse, revision, revise
RF Constant Radius Turn to Fix
RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
RMT remote
RNG range
RNWY runway
ROL roll
ROM read only memory
rpm revolutions per minute
RST FUEL reset fuel
RSV reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
RT right
RVRSNRY reversionary
RX receive
S south
SA Selective Availability
SAT Static Air Temperature
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation
System
SCIT Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
SD Secure Digital
sec second(s)
SEL, SLCT select
SFC surface
SIAP Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET Significant Meteorological
Information
Sim simulator
SLP/SKD slip/skid
SMBL symbol
SPD speed
SPI Special Position Identification
SPKR speaker
SQ squelch
SRVC, SVC service
STAL stall
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route
STATS statistics
STBY standby
STD standard
SUA Special Use Airspace
SUSP suspend
SVS Synthetic Vision System
SW software
SYS system
T true
TA Traffic Advisory
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation System
TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
TAS Traffic Advisory System, true
airspeed
TAT Total Air Temperature
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning
System
TCA Terminal Control Area
TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System
TEL telephone
TEMP temperature
TERM terminal
TF Track Between Two Fixes
TFR Temporary Flight Restriction
T HDG True Heading
TIS Traffic Information System
TIT Turbine Inlet Temperature
TKE Track Angle Error
TMA Terminal Maneuvering Area
TMR/REF Timer/Reference
Topo topographic
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
558
APPENDIX C
Track Direction of aircraft movement
relative to a ground position; also
‘Ground Track’
Track Angle Error The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
TRG target
TRK track
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
TRUNC truncated
TTL total
TURN procedure turn
TX transmit
UNAVAIL unavailable
USR user
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
UTM/UPS Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
V, Vspeed velocity (airspeed)
VA Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP VOR approach
VAR variation
VD Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc volts, direct current
VERT vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary
to descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
VFOM Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VHF Very High Frequency
VI Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM Heading Vector to Manual
Termination
VMC Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV vertical navigation
VOL volume
VOR VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL Vertical Protection Level
VPROF VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH VNV path, vertical path
VR Heading Vector to Radial
VS vertical speed
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR Vertical Speed Required
VTF vector to final
W watt(s), west
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
WGS-84 World Geodetic System - 1984
WPT waypoint(s)
WW world wide
WX weather
XFER, XFR transfer
XPDR transponder
XTALK cross-talk
XTK cross-track
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
559
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of the Perspective™ system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly
asked questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or
a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
wh a t i S SBaS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
ho w d o e S SBaS a f f e c t a P P r o a c h o P e r a t i o n S ?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
wh a t i S raiM a n d h o w d o e S i t a f f e c t a P P r o a c h o P e r a t i o n S ?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
•MonitorsandveriesintegrityandgeometryoftrackedGPS satellites
•Notiesthepilotwhensatelliteconditionsdonotprovidethenecessarycoveragetosupportacertainphase
of flight
•Predictssatellitecoverageofadestinationareatodeterminewhetherthenumberofavailablesatellitesis
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE
: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
560
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
wh y M i g h t t h e r e B e n o a P P r o a c h e S a v a i l a B l e f o r a f l i g h t P l a n ?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
wh a t h a P P e n S w h e n a n a P P r o a c h i S S e l e c t e d ? ca n a f l i g h t P l a n w i t h a n a P P r o a c h , a d e P a r t u r e , o r a n
a r r i v a l B e S t o r e d ?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
Perspective™ System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified.
Should an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until
the procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
ca n “S l a n t go l f ” (“/g”) B e f i l e d u S i n g t h e Pe r S P e c t i v e ™ S y S t e M ?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
wh a t d o e S t h e oBS So f t k e y d o ?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
561
APPENDIX D
Normal (OBS not activated)
•Automatic sequencing of waypoints
•ManualcoursechangeonHSInotpossible
•Alwaysnavigates‘TO’theactivewaypoint
•Mustbeinthismodefornalapproach
course
OBS
•Manualsequencing-‘holds’onselected
waypoint
•Manuallyselectcoursetowaypointfrom
HSI
•Indicates‘TO’or‘FROM’waypoint
•Cannotbesetfornalapproachcourseor
published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the CRS/
BARO
Knob
and HSI (much like a VOR).
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the
OBS
Softkey designation changes to
SUSP
. Selecting
the
SUSP
Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The
OBS
Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
wh y M i g h t t h e Pe r S P e c t i v e ™ Sy S t e M n o t a u t o M a t i c a l l y S e q u e n c e t o t h e n e X t w a y P o i n t ?
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
ho w c a n a w a y P o i n t B e S k i P P e d i n a n a P P r o a c h , a d e P a r t u r e , o r a n a r r i v a l ?
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
wh e n d o e S t u r n a n t i c i Pat i o n B e g i n ?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
•Awaypointalert(‘NextDTK###°in#seconds’or‘NextHDG###°in#seconds’)appearsonthePFD10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
•Aashingturnadvisory(‘Turn[right/left]to###°in#seconds’)appearsonthePFD10secondsbeforethe
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
•The To/From indicator on the HSI ips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
562
APPENDIX D
wh e n d o e S t h e cdi S c a l e c h a n g e ?
Once a departure is activated, the Perspective™ Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to
0.3 nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
wh y d o e S t h e hSi n o t r e S P o n d l i k e a vor w h e n oBS M o d e i S a c t i v e ?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
wh a t i S t h e c o r r e c t M i S S e d a P P r o a c h P r o c e d u r e ? ho w i S t h e M i S S e d a P P r o a c h h o l d i n g P o i n t S e l e c t e d ?
To comply with TSO specifications, the Perspective™ does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
af t e r a M i S S e d a P P r o a c h , h o w c a n t h e S a M e a P P r o a c h B e r e -S e l e c t e d ? ho w c a n a n e w a P P r o a c h B e
a c t i v a t e d ?
NOTE
: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the
PROC
Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large
FMS
Knob and pressing the
ENT
Key. The Perspective™ provides
navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the
PROC
Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the
ENT
Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the
ENT
Key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
563
APPENDIX E
MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS
Item Symbol
Unknown Airport
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Towered, Serviced Airport
Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport
NAVAIDS
Item Symbol
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
BASEMAP
Item Symbol
Interstate Highway
State Highway
US Highway
National Highway
City
State/Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Latitude/Longitude
AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES
Item Symbol
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
564
APPENDIX E
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Feature Symbol
Terrain Proximity/TAWS-B display enabled
Traffic display enabled
NEXRAD display enabled
Cloud Top display enabled
Echo Top display enabled
XM Lightning display enabled
Cell Movement display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
County Warnings display enabled
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(loss of GPS position)
TRAFFIC
Item Symbol
Non-threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory, Beyond Map Range
Traffic Advisory
MISCELLANEOUS
Item Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector
Overzoom Indicator
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
565
APPENDIX E
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table E-1 Obstacle Colors
TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS
1000 ft
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure E-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation
Figure E-2 TAWS-B Potential Impact Points
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
566
APPENDIX E
Bl a n k Pa g e
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
I-1
INDEX
A
Activate a Flight Plan --------------------------------------218
Active channel ----------------------------------------------497
Active database ------------------------------------- 543, 547
Active frequency ------------------------------------ 106, 115
ADS-B --------------------------------------------------------354
AFCS Status Annunciation --------------------------------- 51
AFCS Status Box -------------------------------------- 50, 387
AHRS -------------------------------------------- 530, 531, 532
Air Data Computer ------------------------------------------- 1
Airport
Information ----------------------------------------------176
Airspace Alerts -------------------------------- 191, 192, 285
Airspeed Indicator --------------------------------------50, 52
Airways
Collapsed -------------------------------------------------232
Expanded -------------------------------------------------232
Alerting system ---------------------------------------------515
Alert levels --------------------------------------------------517
Alerts --------------------------------------------------------515
Aircraft ----------------------------------------------------518
Audio voice ----------------------------------------------521
Along Track Offset ---------------------------------- 223, 224
ALT -----------------------------------------------------------281
Altimeter -------------------------------------------------50, 55
Altitude
Constraints ---------------------------------------- 235, 268
Altitude alerting --------------------------------------------- 77
Altitude Hold Mode ---------------------------------------392
Altitude Reference ---------------------------- 391, 392, 399
Annunciations
AFCS Status ----------------------------------------------535
Test tone --------------------------------------------- 27, 516
Annunciator lights -----------------------------------------130
AOPA airport directory ----------------------- 433, 493, 494
AOPA Airport Directory ------------------------------------542
Approach ----------------------------------------------------560
Activating ------------------------------------------------248
ILS ---------------------------------------------------------424
Loading -------------------------------------- 215, 245, 247
Missed ----------------------------------------------------427
Removing -------------------------------------------------248
WAAS -----------------------------------------------------426
Approach box ----------------------------------------------480
Approach Mode ------------------------------- 409, 424, 426
APR softkey ------------------------------------------ 247, 252
Arc HSI -------------------------------------------------------- 60
Arrival procedure -----198, 213, 242, 244, 266, 268, 277
Assist, engine leaning --------------------------------- 94–96
Attitude --------------------------------------------------------- 1
Attitude Indicator ---------------------------------------50, 54
Audio alerting system ------------------------------ 516, 517
Audio panel fail-safe operation --------------------------137
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast -------354
Automatic Descent Mode --------------------------------535
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) -------- 383–432
Alerts and annunciations ----------------------- 429–430
Status Annunciations -----------------------------------429
Status Box ------------------------------------------------387
Automatic squelch -----------------------------------------114
Autopilot ----------------------------------------------------383
Autopilot Disconnect ------------------------------- 385, 413
Auto-tuning, COM -----------------------------------------109
Auto-tuning, NAV ----------------------------------- 117, 121
Auto Zoom --------------------------------------------------144
Auxiliary Pages (AUX) -------------------------------------- 37
AUX - system status page 454, 456, 475, 476, 490, 492,
494
Aviation Symbols ------------------------------------ 155, 198
Avidyne TAS600 --------------------------------------------368
B
Backlighting ------------------------------------------------- 48
Barometric altimeter setting --------------------------50, 56
Bearing/distance, measuring -----------------------------150
Bearing information -------------------------- 51, 62–63, 63
Bearing source ---------------------------------------------- 63
C
Calibrated Airspeed ----------------------------------------250
CDI --------------------------------- 245, 257, 268, 276, 283
CELL MOV Softkey -----------------------------------------303
Chart Not Available --------------------------------- 458, 478
Chart options ---------------------------------------- 466, 485
Chart setup box ------------------------------------- 472, 488
ChartView -------------------------------------- 433, 457, 475
ChartView database ---------------------------------------475
ChartView functions ---------------------------------------457
ChartView plan view --------------------------------------467
ChartView profile view ------------------------------------468
ChartView softkeys ----------------------------------------457
Checklists -------------------------------------------- 502–503
Checklist softkeys ------------------------------------------502
CLD TOP Softkey -------------------------------------------301
Closest Point ------------------------------------------------232
COM channel spacing -------------------------------------113
COM Frequency Box ---------------------------------------106
Command Bars ---------------------------------------------388
Communication (COM) Frequency Window ------------ 50
Comparator Window ---------------------------51, 414, 516
COM tuning failure ----------------------------------------137
Controls
Softkeys ----------------------------------------------- 14–17
Copy a Flight Plan -----------------------------------------218
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) ----------------50, 64–65
Changing scale ------------------------------------------562
Course To Altitude -----------------------------------------249
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F) -------------------- 82
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
I-2
INDEX
D
Databases ---------------------------------------------- 23, 541
Database synchronization -------------- 27, 543, 544, 546
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Datalink receiver troubleshooting -----------------------513
Data Logging ---------------------------------------- 433, 505
Date and time ----------------------------------------------- 40
Day/Night views ------------------------------------- 472, 488
Day view ---------------------------------472, 473, 488, 489
Dead Reckoning --------------------------------------------- 79
Declutter, display -------------------------------------------- 80
Declutter maps ------------------------------------------15, 20
Delete Flight Plans -----------------------------------------219
Deleting
An entire airway ---------------------------------- 220, 221
An entire procedure ----------------------------- 220, 221
An individual waypoint -------------------------- 220, 221
Flight Plan Items ----------------------------------------220
Density Altitude --------------------------------------------252
Departure
Procedure -----------------------------211, 227, 239, 241
Select -----------------------------------239, 242, 245, 248
Time -------------------------------------------------------250
Timer ------------------------------------------------------- 47
Digital audio entertainment --------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP) -------------------------------- 30
Direct-to - 169, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 233, 234, 266,
268, 283
Display backup ---------------------------------------------- 25
DME
HOLD mode ----------------------------------------------123
NAV1 mode ----------------------------------------------123
DME information ----------------------------------------51, 63
DME transceiver pairing ----------------------------------123
DME tuning window --------------------------------------123
DR mode ----------------------------------------------------- 79
E
ECHO TOP Softkey -----------------------------------------300
Electronic checklists --------------------433, 502, 503, 504
Electronic Stability and Protection -----------54, 433, 509
Emergency checklist ---------------------------------------503
Emergency Frequency -------------------------------------137
Engine Indication System (EIS) ----------------------- 81–98
Entering Flight ID ------------------------------------------124
Entertainment inputs --------------------------------------134
ESP ----------------------------------------- 54, 509, 510, 511
ESP™ ------------------------------------------- 433, 509, 512
Estimated Position Error (EPE) ---------------------------- 30
Ethernet ------------------------------------------------------ 24
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) --------------------- 94–95
F
Fail-safe operation -----------------------------------------137
Field of View (SVS) -----------------------------------------166
Flight director (FD) -----------------------------------------383
Modes, vertical ----------------------------------- 389–403
Flight ID -----------------------------------------------------124
Flight Level Change Mode ------------------- 394, 420, 422
Flight plan
Closest point to reference -----------------------------232
Storing ----------------------------------------------------560
Flight timer --------------------------------------------------- 46
FliteCharts ------------------------------------------- 433, 477
FliteCharts® ------------------------------------------------433
FliteCharts cycle --------------------------------------------490
FliteCharts database --------------------------------------491
FliteCharts expiration -------------------------------------491
FliteCharts functions --------------------------------------477
FPA ---------------------------------------------------- 235, 273
Frequency
Nearest ---------------------------------------------------189
Frequency spacing -----------------------------------------113
Frequently asked questions -------------------------------559
Fuel
Calculations ----------------------------------------------- 89
Efficiency -------------------------------------------------252
Endurance ------------------------------------------------252
Flow -------------------------------------------------------- 86
Remaining ------------------------------------------------252
Required --------------------------------------------------252
Statistics --------------------------------------------------251
Fuel calculations -------------------------------------------- 96
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH) ----------------------------------- 82
Fuel on Board ----------------------------------------------252
G
GDC 74A ------------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69/69A ---------------------------------------------1, 287
GDU 1040 ----------------------------------------------------- 1
GEA 71 --------------------------------------------------------- 1
GFC 700 -----------------------------------------------------383
GIA 63W ------------------------------------------------------- 1
Glidepath ----------------------------------------------------281
Glidepath indicator ----------------------------------------- 58
Glidepath Mode (GP) ------------------------- 400, 409, 426
Glideslope ---------------------------------------------------281
Glideslope indicator ---------------------------------------- 58
Glideslope Mode ------------------------------------ 402, 424
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation ---------------------------------------- 193–286
GMA 347 ------------------------------------------------- 1, 23
GMU 44 -------------------------------------------------------- 1
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
I-3
INDEX
Go Around Mode ----------------------------------- 427–428
GRS 77 --------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTS 800 -----------------------------------------------------532
GTX 33 --------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders ---------------------------124
H
Heading ------------------------------------------------------ 50
Heading Select Mode -------------------------------------406
HI SENS ------------------------------------------------------122
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) -------------50, 59–70
HSI double green arrow -----------------------------------115
HSI magenta arrow ----------------------------------------115
HSI single green arrow ------------------------------------115
Hypoxia ----------------------------------------- 433, 507, 508
I
IDENT function -------------------------------------- 126, 130
ID indicator -------------------------------------------------117
ILS approach ------------------------------------------------424
Indicated airspeed ------------------------------------------ 52
Indicated Altitude ------------------------------------------250
INFO box ----------------------------------------------------481
Initialization (system) --------------------------------------- 23
Inset Map ---------------------------------------------------- 51
Intercom system (ICS) -------------------------------------134
Intersection
Information --------------------------------------- 177–178
Inverting a flight plan -------------------------------------218
IOI ---------------------------------- 335, 345, 536, 537, 538
J
Jeppesen aviation database ------------------------------542
K
Key(s) --------------------------------------------------------8, 9
L
Land Symbols -----------------------------------------------154
LNAV ---------------------------------------------------------257
LO SENS -----------------------------------------------------122
Low Altitude Annunciation -------------------------------- 77
LPV ---------------------------------------------- 257, 283, 415
M
Mach number------------------------------------------------ 50
Magnetometer ------------------------------------------------ 1
Map
Panning ---------------------------------------------------146
Map pages --------------------------------------------------- 36
Map symbols -----------------------------------------------563
Marker beacon ---------------------------------------------122
Marker beacon annunciations ---------------------------- 75
MASQ processing ------------------------------------------- 99
Measurement units, changing displayed ---------------- 41
Menus -------------------------------------------------------- 34
Message advisories -------------- 517, 525, 530, 531, 532
Messages window -----------------------------------------501
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) -------------------51, 78
MISCOMP ---------------------------------------------------520
Missed Approach----------- 198, 249, 254, 257, 283, 427
MKR/MUTE -------------------------------------------------122
Mode S ----------------------------------------------- 124, 125
Mode selection softkeys --------------------------- 124, 125
Morse code identifier --------------------------------------117
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys ---------------------------------------------------- 19
N
National Weather Service ---------------------------------311
Navigation
Database ------------------------------------------ 235, 236
Map -------------------------------------------------------195
Navigation Mode ---------------------- 407–408, 418–419
Navigation mode selection -------------------------------115
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Window ------------------- 50
Navigation source ------------------------------------- 64–66
Navigation Status Box ------------------------------------- 50
Nav radio selection ----------------------------------------115
Nearest
Airport ------------- 173, 174, 175, 176, 189–192, 247
Airport Minimum Runway Length --------------------176
Airports Page ------------------------------- 174, 175, 176
Airport Surface Matching ------------------------------176
VOR ------------------------------------------------ 189–190
Nearest airports, frequency tuning ----------------------109
Nearest Pages (NRST) -------------------------------------- 37
NEXRAD Softkey -------------------------------------------296
Night view -------------------------------472, 473, 488, 489
Non-path descent -----------------------------398, 422–423
Normal display operation ---------------------------------- 24
O
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 69–70
Obstacles --------------------------------------------- 527, 528
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI) -----------------------------------82, 86
Oil Temperature (OIL °F) ----------------------------------- 82
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS) ---------------------- 560–561
Other Statistics -------------------------------------- 250, 252
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
I-4
INDEX
P
Page groups -------------------------------------------- 35–38
Page menus -------------------------------------------------- 34
Parallel Track ----------------------------------------- 225, 227
Passenger address -----------------------------------------132
PA system ---------------------------------------------------132
Pilot profiles -------------------------------------------- 42–43
PIT ------------------------------------------------------------520
Pitch Hold Mode -------------------------------------------390
Pitch indication ---------------------------------------------- 54
Power-up page ---------------------------------------------502
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Softkeys ----------------------------------------------- 14–16
Procedures
GFC 700 ------------------------------------------- 415–432
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz ------------------------------108
R
RAIM --------------------------------------244, 254, 255, 256
Ram Air Temperature (RAT) -------------------------------- 71
Range --------------------------------------------------------164
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) 31–32,
254, 559
Required
Vertical Speed -------------------------------------------274
Vertical Speed Indicator --------------------------------274
Reversionary Mode --------------------------------25–26, 28
Reversionary Sensor Window --------------------- 414, 517
ROC -------------------------------- 335, 345, 536, 537, 538
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------405
RS-232 ---------------------------------------------------------- 4
RS-485 ---------------------------------------------------------- 3
RVSI --------------------------------------------------- 274, 275
RX indicator -------------------------------------------------107
S
SafeTaxi ----------------------------------------- 433, 451, 454
SafeTaxi® ---------------------------------------------------433
SafeTaxi database ------------------------------------------455
SBAS -------------------------------------------- 254, 256, 559
Scheduler ---------------------------------------433–434, 500
Secure Digital (SD) card ---------------------------- 502, 541
Selected Altitude - 50, 77, 390, 391, 393, 394, 395, 399
Selected Altitude Capture Mode 390, 391, 392, 393, 395,
403
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc ---------------------------167
Selected Altitude Range Arc ---------------------------10, 55
Selected Course ---------------------------- 51, 60, 408, 410
Selected Heading -------------------------------- 51, 60, 406
Selecting a COM radio ------------------------------------106
Sensor -------------------------------------------------------520
Sequencing, automatic ------------------------------------561
Skywatch ----------------------------------------------------375
Slip/Skid Indicator ---------------------------------------50, 54
Softkeys
LTNG ------------------------------------------------------302
MFD -------------------------------------------------------- 19
PFD ------------------------------------------------14–16, 50
Sort Flight Plans --------------------------------------------218
Speaker ------------------------------------------------------130
Split COM operation ---------------------------------------133
Standby database ------------------------------------------543
Standby frequency ---------------------------- 106, 109, 115
Standby frequency field -----------------------------------106
Stereo headsets --------------------------------------------130
Stormscope -------------------------------------------------317
Stuck microphone ------------------------------------------137
Sunrise -------------------------------------------------------251
Sunset -------------------------------------------------------251
SVS ------------------------------------------------------------ 54
SVS troubleshooting ---------------------------------------512
Symbols, map -----------------------------------------------563
Synthetic vision (SVS) ------------------------------ 433, 434
Synthetic Vision System ------------------------------------ 54
System annunciations -------------------------------------515
System Page (EIS) ------------------------------------------- 96
System time -------------------------------------------------- 50
T
Tachometer (RPM) --------------------------------------82, 86
TAF -----------------------------------------------------------305
Takeoff Mode -----------------------------------------------403
TAS -----------------------------------------------------------530
TAWS ------------------------------------------------- 351, 537
Terminal procedures charts ------------------------ 458, 478
Terrain -------------------------------------------------------527
Color indications ----------------------------------------565
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) ------537
Annunciation --------------------------------------------- 76
Terrain Proximity -------------------------------------------323
Terrain-SVS -------------------------------328, 383, 432, 509
Timer
Departure -------------------------------------------------- 47
Flight ------------------------------------------------------- 46
Timer, PFD generic ------------------------------------------ 45
TOD --------------------------------------------- 273, 274, 280
TOPO DATA ------------------------------------ 151, 152, 161
Top of Descent -------------------------------------- 273, 274
TOPO SCALE ------------------------------------------------153
Track ---------------------------------------------------------- 59
Track Vector -------------------------------------------------162
190-00820-06 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE AFCS ADDITIONAL
FEATURES APPENDICES INDEX
I-5
INDEX
Traffic
Annunciation -----------------------------------------51, 75
Traffic Advisory System ------------------------------------532
Traffic Information Service (TIS)
Voice alerts ------------------------------------------------ 75
Transponder code entry -----------------------------------127
Transponder data box -------------------------------------- 99
Transponder ground mode -------------------------------125
Transponder mode field ------------------------99, 125, 126
Transponder standby mode ------------------------------126
Transponder Status Box ------------------------------------ 50
Trend Vector
Turn Rate -------------------------------------------------- 62
Trip Planning ----------------------------------- 250, 251, 252
Trip statistics ------------------------------------------------251
True Airspeed ------------------------------------------ 52, 252
Turn anticipation -------------------------------------------561
Turn Rate Indicator -------------------------------------50, 62
TX indicator -------------------------------------------------107
U
Unable to display chart ---------------------------- 458, 478
Updating Garmin databases -----------------------------455
Updating Jeppesen databases ---------------------------475
V
VDI ---------------------------------------------------- 274, 275
Vertical deviation ------------------------------------------397
Vertical deviation guidance ------------------------------236
Vertical Deviation Indicator ------------------------------274
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) ---------------------51, 58
Vertical navigation -----------------------------------------235
Direct-to --------------------------------------------------234
Vertical Navigation flight control ----------------- 395–399
Vertical Path Tracking Mode -----------------395–396, 421
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------236
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) -------------------------50, 58
Vertical Speed Mode --------------------------------------393
Vertical Speed Reference ---------------------------------393
VFR code ----------------------------------------------------129
VNAV --------------------------------------------------------197
VNAV Target Altitude ------------------------------- 395–398
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode -------------------399
VNV ---------------------------------------273, 533, 534, 558
VNV guidance
Disabling -------------------------------------------------233
Enabling --------------------------------------------------233
VNV indications, PFD --------------------------------------- 74
VNV Target Altitude ---------------------------------------- 51
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic -------------------------------------381
VOR
Nearest -------------------------------------------- 189–190
VOR selection -----------------------------------------------115
VSI ------------------------------------------------------------275
Vspeed references ------------------------------------------ 53
VS TGT ------------------------------------------------ 235, 273
W
WAAS ------------------------------------------- 257, 415, 559
WAAS precision approach --------------------------------426
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing ---------------------------------561
Skipping --------------------------------------------------561
Waypoint Pages (WPT) ------------------------------------- 36
Waypoint Selection Submenu -- 194, 201, 205, 206, 255
Weather (real-time) ------------------------------------------- 4
Wind -------------------------------------------------- 142, 163
Wind data ------------------------------------------------51, 73
WIND Softkey -----------------------------------------------309
X
XM
Radio ----------------------------------------------- 287, 495
Receiver troubleshooting ------------------------------513
XM Satellite Weather -----------------------------------287
XM channel list ---------------------------------------------497
XM radio ----------------------------------------------------497
XM radio entertainment ----------------------------------134
XM radio presets -------------------------------------------499
XM radio volume -------------------------------------------499
XM satellite radio ----------------------------------- 495, 497
XM Service class -------------------------------------------496
XM weather/radio -------------------------------------------- 4
Z
Zoom
Auto -------------------------------------------------------144
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-06 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICESINDEX
I-6
INDEX
Bl a n k Pa g e
®
Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus Perspective™
by Garmin Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

Navigation menu